JP6623357B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention can execute a variable display game based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening provided in a game area, and can give a game value to a player when a result of the variable display game is a special result. A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state.

  In a conventional gaming machine, a start memory can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit value based on a winning in a start winning opening, and a special figure change display game is executed based on the start memory (for example, see Patent Reference 1).

JP 2010-099315 A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, a problem occurs when performing simultaneous variation in which the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed .
An object of the present invention is to prevent a problem from occurring even when such simultaneous fluctuation is performed .

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
A special game state in which a variable display game is executed based on winning of a game ball in a starting winning opening provided in a game area and a special value is given to a player when a result of the variable display game is a special result. In a gaming machine that generates
A first starting winning opening and a second starting winning opening are provided as the starting winning opening;
A first variable display game is executed as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port, and a second variable display game is executed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting winning port. A variable display game execution control means for executing a variable display game;
An effect display device capable of executing a decoration variation display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information corresponding to the variation display game,
As the game modes, there are provided a first game mode defined as a variable display game in which the first variable display game is the main, and a second game mode defined as a variable display game in which the second variable display game is the main. And
The special result includes a first special result and a second special result having a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special result,
When displaying the number-of-executable times or the number-of-games information on the number of times of execution of the variable display game in the predetermined period on the effect display device, the number-of-games information is displayed during a period in which the variable display game is not mainly executed. Not
If the first variable display games and results of at least the first said during the variable display game second variable display games of the second variable display game becomes the first special results, the first Stopping the first variable display game with a result other than the special result, and not restarting the first variable display game after the special game state based on the second variable display game ends;
If the first variable display games and results of at least the first said during the variable display game second variable display games of the second variable display game becomes the second special results, the first interrupted one variable display games, characterized in that the said second variable display games special gaming state rather based resume the first variable display game that was interrupted at the end of completion.

According to an embodiment of the present invention , it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring even when performing simultaneous variation in which the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed .

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the composition of a collective display. It is a figure explaining the display mode of special figure 1 display. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 2 display. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 2 display. It is a figure explaining the composition of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining an opening and closing pattern of a special fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining an opening and closing pattern of a special fluctuation winning device. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining random number update processing 1. 9 is a flowchart illustrating random number update processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / status monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a fraud & winning monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining an effect command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a change in the abnormal fluctuation number. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example in which an abnormal change notification is performed. It is a flowchart explaining a game machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure starting port 1 switch process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure suspension information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure starting port 2 switch process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 game process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 game process. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening switch monitoring process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2-byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a high probability change frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation | variation process transfer setting process. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 2 change processing change setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 changing process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process shift setting processing 1. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 2 display processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process shift setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 display process shift setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart for explaining the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 1. It is a flow chart explaining the processing change setting processing 2 during the opening of the special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during opening of a special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit operation | movement setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening residual ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit fanfare middle process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hitting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining sphere process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit ending processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED editing process. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a board radio wave unauthorized monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining the starting port 1 signal edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining a main prize ball signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol determination frequency signal editing process. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a display mode on a display device. It is a figure explaining the change aspect of the design symbol for effects. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a display mode on a display device. It is a figure explaining change of the upper limit of starting memory. It is a figure explaining change of the upper limit of starting memory. It is a figure explaining another example of a display mode on a display. It is a figure explaining another example of a display mode on a display. It is a figure explaining change of the upper limit of starting memory. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a display mode on a display device. It is a flowchart explaining an effect lottery process. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a display mode on a display device. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a display mode on a display device. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a display mode on a display device. It is a figure explaining the display mode in the number-of-games display part in the 1st modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode on a display device according to a first modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode on a display device according to a first modification. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process according to a second modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 game process in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 game process in the 2nd modification. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening switch monitoring processing in the second modification. It is a figure explaining the example where special figure 2 abnormal change information is performed in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining change of special figure 2 abnormal winning number in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining change of special figure 2 abnormal winning number in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the composition of the collective display in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining interruption of the special figure change display game in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the display at the time of interruption in a 4th modification, and a special figure indicator. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the display at the time of interruption in a 4th modification, and a special figure indicator. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 change process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 changing process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 game process in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 game process in the 4th modification. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 big hit end processing in the 4th modification. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 2 big hit end processing in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end process in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end process in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the pattern of the control method in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode on the special figure indicator in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the composition of the special figure indicator in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the composition of the special figure indicator in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the composition of the special figure indicator in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the composition of the special figure indicator in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the composition of the special figure indicator in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining transition of a game state in the 6th modification. It is a figure explaining the transmission timing of the probability information command in the 6th modification. It is a figure explaining the transmission timing of the customer waiting command in the 6th modification. It is a figure explaining change of the upper limit of starting memory in the 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the update process of the number of times of high probability fluctuation in the 7th modification. It is a figure explaining the big hit type in the 8th modification, and the upper limit of starting memory. It is a flowchart explaining the hard random number acquisition process in the 9th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure reservation information determination processing in the 9th modification.

<First embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce effects, and notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19 a that emits sound (for example, sound effect). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12. When an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b notify the contents of the abnormality by voice. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp | ramp for payout abnormality notification in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15. FIG.

An upper plate 21 (reservoir plate) for supplying game balls to a hit ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are provided below the front frame 12. An outflow upper ball exit 22, an lower plate (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a hitting ball firing device, and the like are provided. Further, an effect button 25 having an effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from a player is provided on an upper edge portion of the upper plate 21. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from a player is provided. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In this embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25. However, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub-display device is provided near the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  On the right side of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball firing device moves the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect or the like in which the operation of the player is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30 respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent game balls from jumping from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (CRT). In a region (display region) where an image on the display screen can be displayed, a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), characters relating to a special figure variation display game, and information relating to a game such as a background image for enhancing a rendering effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are displayed in a variable manner (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. In addition, a board effect device 44 that performs a game effect by operating is provided on the left and right portions of the center case 40. The board presentation device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  Also, three general prize holes 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general prize hole 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game balls that have won the general winning opening 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 12).

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game is provided. The game ball that has won the first starting winning port 36 is detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 12). Further, a second start winning opening 37 (start winning opening, start winning region) for providing a start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game is provided below and to the right of the center case 40 in the game area 32. The game ball that has won the second starting winning port 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 12).

  Below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and to the right of the first starting winning port 36, a first special which can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure change display game. A variable winning device (upper winning port) 38 is provided.

  The first special fluctuation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side is tilted forward, and is a result of a special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on the situation, the state of the winning opening is changed from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, an upper winning prize opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by an upper winning prize opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 12) as a driving device. During the special game state based on the above, the upper winning a prize port is changed from a closed state to an open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize winning port, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. ).

  Inside the upper winning prize port (winning area), an upper prize winning switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 12) is provided as a detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the upper prize winning port. I have. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two upper winning port switches 38a are provided, and a gaming ball flowing into the upper winning port is detected by one of the upper winning port switches 38a. By providing a plurality of the upper winning a prize port switches 38a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect a game ball flowing into the upper prize winning port.

  Immediately below the first starting winning opening 36, a second special changing winning device (lower winning opening) 39 capable of converting between a state in which game balls are not accepted and an easy-to-accept state depending on the result of the special figure changing display game is provided. Have been. The second special fluctuation winning device 39 is provided with an opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by turning the upper end side in a direction of falling toward the front side and converted into a state where a game ball can easily flow.

  The second special fluctuation winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end side falls down to the front side, and is a result of a special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the lower large winning opening is converted from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (state advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable winning device 39 has, for example, a lower big winning opening which is opened and closed by an opening / closing door 39c driven by a lower big winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 12) as a driving device. During the special game state based on the game, the lower large winning opening is changed from a closed state to an open state to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the lower large winning opening, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. ).

  Inside the lower winning opening (winning area), there is provided a lower winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 12) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the winning opening. . Further, below the second special variable winning device 39, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize port or the like.

  The arrangement of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 is not limited to this. For example, a second special variable winning device 39 may be provided adjacent to the upper side or lower side of the first special variable winning device 38 in FIG. In this case, they may be completely overlapped vertically, or may be partially overlapped vertically shifted. Also, the opening and closing doors 38c and 39c are not limited to the attacker type, and other types such as a slide type in which the large winning opening can be opened by sliding a plate-like member capable of closing the large winning opening can be used. May be in the form of

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 32 in which the gaming ball flows, the left area of the center case 40 is defined as a left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is defined as a right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and shoots a game ball to the left game area (so-called left hit), thereby aiming at a prize at the first start winning opening 36, and fires a game ball to the right game area. By making a so-called right strike, it is possible to aim for a prize in the second starting prize port 37 or the first special variable prize winning device 38. It should be noted that the second special variable winning device 39 can aim even if the game ball is fired in either the left or right game area.

  Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end of the center case 40 is provided at a position corresponding to the right game area, and the flow is launched into the right game area. The played game ball is configured to pass through a flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. In addition, since the material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows a game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, the player or the like A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. .

  Outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), a special figure 1 variable display game and a special figure 2 variable display game, which are the special figure variable display game, and a collective display of various information are displayed. A display device 50 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display for a special figure 1 change display game (a first special figure change display unit) configured by a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. 51 (D1) and a special figure 2 display (second special figure change display unit) 52 (D2) for a special figure 2 change display game, and a special figure 1 change display game and a special figure 2 change formed of LED lamps. A storage display unit 54 (D11 to D14) for informing the number of stored memories of the display game is provided.

  The round display unit 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the first special variable prize device 38 or the second special variable prize device 39) is displayed on the collective display device 50. A first game state display unit 77 (D8 to D10) for informing a player how to hit (the hit corresponding to a game state) which is advantageous to the player between the normal hit and the right hit, and the probability state (high) of the special figure change display game. A probability display unit 78 (D15 to D18) for notifying the probability state or the low probability state is provided. The collective display device 50 has a probability state display unit for displaying that the large hit probability state is in the high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. A unit (display) or the like may be provided. Further, a conventional game changing display game is executed as in a conventional gaming machine, and a second starting winning opening that enables a game ball to win based on the specific result of the game changing display game is formed. When a variable winning device is provided, a general-purpose display unit for displaying a general-purpose variable display game, a memory display unit for notifying the number of start storages of the general-purpose variable display game, light up when a time-saving state occurs, and a time-saving state is generated. May be provided.

  The special figure change display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the change display game, that is, while performing the decoration special figure change display game on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blink cycle is set to, for example, 100 ms. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, as shown in FIG. 3B, in addition to the central segment, the special segment is provided on the lower right side of 7 seg. The eighth segment is also driven to blink to indicate that it is fluctuating, and is configured to be able to distinguish between Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. When the result of the game is "missing", for example, the center segment (the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition to the special figure 1) is turned on as a result mode of the missing, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", a game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than a loss result mode as a hit result mode (special result mode).

  The storage display unit 54 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = reserved number) among the winning ball numbers into the first starting winning port 36, which is a change start condition of the special figure 1 display unit 51, as shown in FIG. As shown in ()), a plurality of LEDs are displayed by turning off and lighting (flashing). Further, the number of undigested balls (starting storage number = reserved number) out of the winning balls to the second starting winning opening 37, which is a change start condition of the special figure 2 display 52, is as shown in FIG. Are displayed by turning off and on (flashing) a plurality of LEDs. The round display unit 60 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and as shown in FIG. 3D, turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and selects according to the special result during the special game state. LED is turned on corresponding to the number of rounds. Note that the round display unit may be configured by a 7-segment display.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 3 (e), the first game state display unit 77 turns off all the LEDs when a left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than a right-handed game (at the time of normal beating). If the player is in a game state in which right-handed is more advantageous than right-handed than in left-handed (right-handed), all LEDs are turned on. As shown in FIG. 3E, the probability display unit 78 turns off all the LEDs when the big hit probability state is the low probability state (normal probability state), and changes the big hit probability state to the high probability state (probable change). In the case of (state), all the LEDs are turned on.

  FIG. 4 shows a display mode on the special figure 1 display unit 51. During the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the center segment and the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment are blinked at a period of 100 ms. Then, the result is displayed by lighting in a mode corresponding to the result at the end of the fluctuation time. In some cases, a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result. In this case, any one of the lighting modes is selected from these by a random number or the like.

  5 and 6 show display modes on the special figure 2 display 52. FIG. During the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the center segment is blinked at a period of 100 ms. Then, the result is displayed by lighting in a mode corresponding to the result at the end of the fluctuation time. In some cases, a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result. In this case, any one of the lighting modes is selected from these by a random number or the like. A plurality of patterns of lighting modes are set for each of a large hit and a small hit, which will be described later. However, this does not clearly notify the player which small hit has occurred, especially when a small hit occurs (recognition). By doing so, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally acquiring a game ball at the time of a small hit by watching the lighting mode of the special figure 2 display 52.

  FIG. 7 shows the probability of the big hit and the small hit, the big probability of the big hit when the big hit is won, and the small probability of the big hit when the small hit is won. The big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device (first special result), and the small hit is a special result without the operation of the condition device (second special result). The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is operated, for example, a big hit state occurs and the second electric machine as a special electric accessory is generated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is operated). The condition device not operating means that the above-described flag is not set, for example, in a case where the small hit lottery is won. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

  The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot (first special result), is common to Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, and the probabilities in the normal gaming state, which is a low-probability state, and the specific gaming state, which is a high-probability state, are shown in FIG. The probability is as shown in FIG. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special game state based on the big hit (the first special game state) is set to a high probability state after the end, and a predetermined number of times (here, 50 times) of the special figure change display game is performed, the low probability state is set. It is configured to be. Further, even if the high probability state is established based on the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 Both are in a high probability state.

  The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is a probability as shown in FIG. The small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. The small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and the small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit do not win twice. Therefore, in the high probability state, the special map 2 always wins either the big hit or the small hit. It should be noted that the result may be a miss.

  FIG. 7 (c) shows the types of jackpots that can be selected in the special maps 1 and 2, the special variable prize winning devices and the distribution probabilities that are opened for each type of jackpot, and FIG. The small hit types that can be selected in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the special variable prize winning device that is opened for each small hit type, the opening time, the number of open times, and the distribution probability are shown. In addition, although the ball is hardly expected for the 2R probability change D1 of the special figure 2, the number of the special figure change display games that can be executed in the high probability state is set to 50 again because of the big hit. In the special game state based on the 2R probability change D1, an effect is performed in which the number of games that can be executed in the high probability state is added.

  8 and 9 show a variation pattern of the special figure variation display game. FIG. 8A shows a fluctuation pattern in a case where the result is out of order in the low probability state. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim at a prize in the first starting winning opening 36 by left-handing and to aim at a winning in the second starting winning opening 37 by right-handed. It has become. That is, it is possible to select which one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly executed according to the player's intention. Further, depending on the game state, the game is designed on the assumption that the game progresses mainly in one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and the player plays the game according to this design. In order to progress, it is configured such that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game mainly with one special figure variable display game that is determined to be the main in the design. In the following description, one special figure fluctuation display game determined to be the main in each game state may be referred to as main fluctuation, and the other special figure fluctuation display game may be referred to as irregular fluctuation.

  In the low probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the irregular variation. Regarding the special figure 2, a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected so that the player proceeds with the game according to this design, regardless of which variation pattern is selected. It has become. That is, in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time that can be determined as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is longer than the fluctuation time that can be determined as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of small hits than the special figure 1 variable display game. The execution of the variable display game in FIG. 2 is made inefficient in time, and in the low probability state, the player is caused to progress the game mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game.

  FIG. 8B shows a fluctuation pattern in a case where the result is out of order in the high probability state. In the high probability state, the result of the lottery for the special figure 2 variable display game is not likely to be incorrect, so no variable pattern is set. For the special figure 1 change display game, only one change pattern can be selected. In the high probability state, contrary to the case of the low probability state described above, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the main fluctuation, and the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the irregular fluctuation.

  Here, the variation time in the case of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game in which irregular fluctuation occurs in the high probability state and a deviation result in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which irregular fluctuation occurs in the low probability state (See FIG. 8A). This is because, as described later, a short time is set as the fluctuation time when the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit in the high probability state. This is because there is no case where the result of (1) is incorrect.

  In other words, in the high probability state in which the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and the time can be efficiently executed, the special figure 1 variable display game, which has a loss result as a result of the lottery, is clearly disadvantageous. Even if the fluctuation time is not set so long, the player can proceed with the game mainly using the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Therefore, it is not necessary to set an unnecessarily long fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, but when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed simultaneously with the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, In order to allow the game to proceed, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is set to be sufficiently longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, so that it is forcibly stopped by a big hit or a small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game.

  FIG. 9A shows a fluctuation pattern in a case where the result is a big hit in the low probability state. For the special figure 2, only the variation pattern that does not cause the reach state can be selected. In the low probability state, the change time when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit may be longer than the change time that can be selected when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit. FIG. 9B shows a fluctuation pattern in a case where the result is a big hit in the high probability state. In any case, a fluctuation pattern with a very short fluctuation time is selected without generating a reach state.

  In particular, when the special figure 1 variable display game is compared with the selectable variable time in the special figure 2 variable display game when a big hit or a small hit is made, the second shortest variable time is selected. ing. This increases the possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game that is irregularly changed even in the high probability state will stop before the special figure 2 variable display game that is the main change. Is less likely to be forcibly changed to a missed result. Note that the distribution of the variation pattern in Toku-zu 2 is performed according to the above-described big hit type, but may be determined by a random number or the like.

  FIG. 9C shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a small hit in the low probability state. In the special figure 2, a long fluctuation in which a fluctuation time of about 10 minutes is set without selecting a reach state is selected. FIG. 9D shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a small hit in the high probability state. In any case, a fluctuation pattern with a very short fluctuation time is selected without generating a reach state. In the special figure 1 variable display game, the same time as in the case of the loss in the high probability state is set to the same time. It has been enough time to be done. The fluctuation time when the special figure 1 variable display game loses or a small hit in the high probability state is a time sufficient to be forcibly stopped by the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. However, the time may be shorter than the time shown here.

  FIGS. 10 and 11 show a special game state (first special game state) based on a big hit (first special result) and a special game state (second special game state) based on a small hit (second special result). The opening and closing pattern of the variable winning device is shown. FIG. 10 shows the opening / closing pattern of the special variable prize winning device in the big hit type and the small hit type which can be selected in the special figure 1 variable display game, and FIG. The opening / closing pattern of the special variable prize winning device in the hit type is shown.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10, when the big hit type becomes the big hit of 16R probability change A1 in the special figure 1 variable display game, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened according to the special winning game opening and closing pattern 1 of the special figure 1. . In the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 in the special figure 1, after the fanfare period of 5000 ms, an opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R). Thereafter, a round in which an interval period of 2000 ms and an opening period of 29000 ms are set is repeated until 16 rounds are performed, and after the ending period of 11000 ms, the special game state ends.

  The time described in the interval period and the ending period in each of the opening and closing patterns shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 is a time obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time and the interval time or the ending time. For example, the interval period in the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 in Special Figure 1 is 2000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 600 ms in the second half is the interval time. The ending period in the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 in Tokuzu 1 is 11000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 9600 ms in the second half is the ending time.

  Other opening / closing patterns include a fanfare period, an opening period, an interval period (including the remaining ball processing time) and an ending period (including the remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure, and accordingly, the first special variable prize winning device. 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. Note that the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 5 on the special figure 2 in FIG. 11 is configured such that the opening period of 27200 ms in 5R is repeated 11 times of opening of 200 ms and closing of 1500 ms 11 times, and then opening is performed for 25000 ms. Also, in any of the opening and closing patterns, when a predetermined number of prizes have been won in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that point.

  In addition, for example, when the opening / closing mode is the same from the start to the middle of the special game state as in the special winning state opening / closing patterns 1-3 and the special winning opening / closing patterns 2 and 3 in the special figure 2, the display is performed. The effect in the device 41 may be the same, and it may be difficult to determine the type of the big hit or the small hit. Furthermore, during the special game state, suggestion or notification of information that enables discrimination of the big hit type and the small hit type may be performed.

  In addition, when the big hit is executed by any of the special winning opening opening / closing patterns 4 and 5 on the special map 2, an effect of whether or not the long opening round is executed again after the end of the 4R (whether or not to continue) is made. It may be performed. In this case, for example, if the special winning opening opening and closing pattern 4 in the special figure 2 is, the short opening is performed from 5R to 16R which is the final round, and the big hit is completed. In the above, the short opening that is substantially the same as 5R to 16R of the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 on the special figure 2 is performed, then the long opening (25000 ms) is performed, and thereafter the same long opening as 4R is restarted. . Therefore, the time between 5R and 15R is used for the special winning opening / closing pattern 4 in the special figure 2 and the time between a plurality of short opening of the 5R is used for the special winning opening / closing pattern 5 in the special figure 2 is used. If it is a special winning game opening and closing pattern 4 in special figure 2, the result that long opening will not resume (big hit game is not continued) is notified if it is special winning game opening and closing pattern 4 By notifying the result that the long opening is restarted (the big hit game is continued), the expectation of the player may be increased.

  From the above, the special result includes the first special result (big hit) that can generate the first special game state and the second special game with a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special game state. The second special result (small hit) that can generate a state is included.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. In addition, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. When a big hit (first special result) and a small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a hit (special result). When the first special game state, which is a special game state based on a big hit, and the second special game state, which is a special game state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special game state.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from the launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by a turning member such as an obstacle nail or a windmill arranged at various places in the game area 32, and a general winning opening 35, a first starting winning opening. 36, the second starting winning port 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and is discharged from the gaming area 32. Is done. Then, when the game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the type of the winning port is determined. A corresponding number of prize balls are discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 12).

  The winning ball to the first starting winning port 36 is detected as a starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game by a starting port 1 switch 36a provided therein, and a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 4 ) Is stored as a limit. In the state where the special figure 1 variable display game can be started and the first start storage number is 0, when a game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36, the first start memory is generated with the generation of the start right. Is stored and the first start storage number is incremented by one, and the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately started based on the first start storage, and at this time, the first start storage number is decremented by one. . On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state is set. When a game ball wins in the first start winning port 36, if the first start storage number is less than the upper limit value, the first start storage number is incremented by one and one first start memory is stored. . Then, in a state where the first start storage number is 1 or more, the special figure 1 variable display game can be started (the previous special figure 1 variable display game ends or the special game state ends). The start memory number is decremented by one, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first start memory.

  The winning ball to the second starting winning port 37 is detected as a starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by a starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside. In the case of the low probability state, if a winning in the second starting winning opening 37 occurs in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately performed based on the winning. Be executed. In addition, a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or a special game state. Even if a game ball wins in the second starting winning port 37, the second starting memory is not generated. Note that if a winning in the second start winning port 37 occurs in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, a second start memory is temporarily generated for the sake of processing, but the second start memory is not stored. Since the game is immediately consumed, the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not generated.

  Also, in the case of the high probability state, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 37 and is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by the start opening 2 switch 37a provided inside. The second start memory is stored with a predetermined upper limit (for example, four) as a limit. If a game ball wins in the second start winning port 37 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started and the second start memory number is 0, the second start memory is generated with the start right. Is stored and the second start storage number is incremented by one, and the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately started based on the second start storage, and at this time, the second start storage number is decremented by one. . On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variable display game is already executed and the special figure 2 variable display game is not finished, or when the special game state is set. When a game ball wins in the second start winning port 37, if the second start storage number is less than the upper limit value, the second start storage number is incremented by one and one second start storage is stored. . Then, in the state where the second start storage number is 1 or more, when the special figure 2 variable display game can be started (the previous special figure 2 variable display game ends or the special game state ends), the second special figure 2 variable display game ends. The start memory number is decremented by one, and the special figure 2 variable display game is started based on the stored second start memory.

  At the time of detection of the starting winning ball, a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, and each variation pattern random number are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random numbers are stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 12). In the special map storage area (part of the RAM), a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times for the first startup memory) is stored as a special map start memory. Then, the storage number of the special figure start storage is displayed on the storage display unit 54 (the special figure 1 hold display, the special figure 2 hold display) of the collective display device 50 for notifying the start winning number, and the center case is displayed. Also in the display device 41 of 40, it is displayed as a decoration special figure start storage display.

  The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variable display apparatus) based on the winning in the first start winning opening 36 or the first start memory, and the second start. The special figure 2 variable display game is performed on the special figure 2 display 52 (second variable display device) based on the winning in the winning opening 37 or the second start memory. The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but during execution of one special figure variable display game, the other special figure variable display game may display a special result (big hit or small hit). In the event that the special figure change display game is ended, the one special figure change display game is ended as a result other than the special result (missing result).

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing the variable display in the display modes as shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. And a first special game state (so-called big hit state). When the result of the special figure change display game is a small hit, a special result mode (small hit result mode) in which the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result. Becomes a small hit and a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 constitutes a first variable display means capable of displaying a first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on winning of a game ball into the first starting winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 constitutes a second variable display means capable of displaying a second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on winning of a game ball into the second starting winning opening 37.

  Also, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, a plurality of kinds of decoration identification information (numerals, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are displayed on the display device (image display device) 41 in a variable manner. A decorative special figure change display game to be executed is executed. The decorative special figure variable display game includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Is displayed in the display area. Then, the fluctuation display is performed in accordance with the fluctuation of the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed along with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game.

  That is, the display device 41 displays the decoration identification information in a variable manner in accordance with the first variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (the special figure 2 variable display game). (A decoration special figure variation display game). Note that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one decorative special figure variable display game may be displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may not be provided in the gaming machine 10, and the special figure change display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of a small hit, but when the normal game state is a low probability state, the variable time is set as the variable pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game. Very long (about 10 minutes) length variations are selected. This makes the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game inefficient in time in the normal game state, and prevents the player from selecting the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at small hits in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to make a left-handed shot to aim at the first starting winning opening 36 and play the special figure 1 variable display game. Note that the long fluctuation time is about 10 minutes, but may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

  Then, when a special hit occurs due to a big hit, the first special variable winning device 38 can be aimed by right-handed. When the second special variable prize winning device 39 is opened in the special game state based on the big hit or the small hit, the player can aim at either right or left. After the end of the special gaming state based on the big hit, the specific gaming state which is a high probability state is set. In this specific game state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short, and it is more advantageous for the player to perform the special figure 2 variable display game by right-handing and aiming at the second starting winning opening 37. It becomes. In the specific game state, the opening of the special variable winning device based on the small hit and the opening of the special variable winning device based on the big hit occur at high frequency, and the player can acquire a large number of game balls.

FIG. 12 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. A CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110 with the input unit 120 and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and operates an operation clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock of a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to generate. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so that they can operate. Is done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC or 5 V DC from the 32 V DC voltage. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to a RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a reset signal and a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, You may comprise so that it may be provided on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on the power supply device 400 or a board different from the main board. Is provided, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the 32V voltage generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects that a power failure has occurred when the voltage drops to, for example, 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated. Based on the signal, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 are forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the game microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111B stores invariable information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  The ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory. Further, the variation pattern table includes a variation variation pattern table selected when the result is a failure, a large variation pattern table selected when the result is a great hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. The table includes a table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like).

  Here, the reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is reached, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not been derived and displayed yet, This refers to a display state in which the displayed result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. And, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variable display game fluctuates a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas on the display device. After the display, the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, and the result mode is displayed. In a case where the condition of the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same state). The state that has become the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be a reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and reach effects having different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving a special result mode include a normal reach (N reach), a special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. Note that the expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. This reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit occurs). That is, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when the special result mode is lost). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which it is more likely that a big hit will occur than in the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure change display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a change pattern (various types) in the special figure change display game. A random number generating circuit for generating a random number for determining a variation pattern for determining reach and non-reach variable display games (including an execution time of a variable display game), a hit random number for determining a hit in a normal map variable display game, and the like. And a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit to the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

  Further, in the process related to the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure change display game, the probability state of the special figure change display game as the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), Any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of variation pattern tables based on the number of start storages. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A forms a change distribution information obtaining unit that obtains one of the plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like. The payout control device 200 drives a payout motor of a payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, and Control for paying out is performed. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball loan request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball rental.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start port 1 switch 36a in the first start winning port 36, and a start port 2 in the second start port 37. The switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and a plurality (1 to x, two in this embodiment) of the upper special winning opening switch 38a and the second special variable winning device 39 arranged in the first special variable winning device 38. An interface chip which is connected to the lower big win switch 39a, receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches, and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V ( Proximity I / F) 121 is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so that a lead wire of a sensor or a proximity switch is short-circuited improperly, a sensor or a switch is disconnected from a connector, or a lead wire is cut to be floating. It is configured to detect an abnormal state as described above and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36 a, the starting port 2 switch 37 a, the winning port switch 35 a, the upper winning port switch 38 a, and the lower winning port switch 39 a are the second input port 123. Is input to Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the second input port 123 and the gaming microcomputer 111.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal operation of the IC from the power supply device 400. Has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 to assert (change to an effective level) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and a first input port 122 described later.

  Also, the input unit 120 includes a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating lack of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (fullness)), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided for taking in a signal based on the data bus 140 and supplying it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RESET can be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each of the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system. However, each data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication route from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol information of the variable display game to the trial shooting test device of the not-shown institution, a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in a game store. Note that a detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the shooting test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test shooting test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The data signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state is impossible. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. The chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the trial test apparatus.

  Further, the output unit 130 has opening / closing data of an upper winning opening solenoid 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the first special variable winning device 38 and a lower winning opening solenoid 39b for opening the second special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting. The output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal plate 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a firing permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signal of the upper special winning opening solenoid 38b and the lower special winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134 to generate and output a solenoid driving signal. Circuit) 138a, second driver 138b that outputs on / off drive signal of segment line on current supply side of collective display device 50 output from third output port 135, collective display device output from fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c for outputting an on / off drive signal for the digit line of the current drawing side of the 50th, and an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71 Four drivers 138d are provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so as to drive a solenoid operated at 32V. In addition, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The dynamic driving method is achieved by applying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line by the second driver 138b outputting 12V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal via the segment line by the third driver 138c outputting the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in the above, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 like a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning port 37, the winning port switch 35a, the upper winning port switch. The non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as proximity switch 38a) includes a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Switch). A micro switch having mechanical contacts is provided for a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and a body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 and the like. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), similar to the game microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and a memory content even if power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held, and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. Note that a RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the production, instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decoration lamp, And processes such as drive control of the solenoid and management of the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image on the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. Note that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of the interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The video data, the horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 includes an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are converted into the production control command signal (production command). ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at 5 VDC and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at 3.3 VDC, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having the provided LED (light emitting diode), a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable character or the like that enhances effect effects in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. It should be noted that a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the input and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for detecting the input and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives the motor and the solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled by the same. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling a VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), a sound source LSI 314, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, a lamp, a motor, and the like are outputted from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In these control circuits, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning port 36, a random number value for the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is extracted. Then, the first start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The random number for big hit determination in the first start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process for determining a hit or a change pattern of the special figure 1 change display game is performed. Further, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the second starting winning port 37, the random number value for the big hit determination of the special figure 2 variable display game and the like are extracted and stored in the RAM 111C. The starting memory is stored. The random number for big hit determination in the second start memory and the like are compared with the determination values stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit or a change pattern of the special figure 2 change display game is performed.

  In the low probability state, the second start memory can be generated only in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started. In this case, the second start storage temporarily stores information necessary for starting the special figure 2 variable display game, and does not suspend the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. In the high probability state, a random number value for judging a big hit in the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 37, as in the case of winning in the first starting winning opening 36. The second start memory is stored in the RAM 111C up to a predetermined upper limit.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying a special figure change display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into the start winning area (the first starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 37). Make the means.

  Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control apparatus 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of setting an effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 forms an effect control unit that controls an effect relating to a game (such as a variable display game).

  When the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and displays the special game mode. Performs processing to generate a state. In the process of generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111A opens the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by using the upper winning prize opening solenoid 38b, for example, so that the game ball can flow into the upper winning prize opening. Control. Alternatively, the opening and closing door 39c of the second special variable winning device 39 is opened by the lower special winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to allow the game balls to flow into the lower special winning opening.

  Then, until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls is won in the special winning opening or a predetermined opening time elapses after opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is set. Opening is defined as one round, and the control (cycle game) of continuing (repeating) this round a predetermined number of times is performed. That is, the game control device 100 forms a special winning opening opening / closing control unit that controls opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result mode is the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure change display game is out of control, control is performed to display a result mode of the out of control on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure change display game is higher than the low probability state. Further, even if the high probability state is established based on the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 Both are in a high probability state.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 18 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 14, first, a process for inhibiting interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer which is a head address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs. Is performed (step X2). Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order. In step X4, the leading 00h is set. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the slave control unit (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is executed. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, and the like). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a target of validity determination) of the RAM that is not a target of validity determination (calculation of a checksum). Accordingly, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude some of the RAM areas, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the elapse of the standby time, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the elapse of the standby time, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, the operation can be detected immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on can be detected. Can be prevented from being rejected.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) are performed. First, a power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via a port and a data bus to set the number of times of checking (for example, two times) (step X8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step X9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step X10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step X9). If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits for the power to be shut off. In this manner, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a power failure from being erroneously detected due to noise or the like, and appropriately cope with a failure when the power is turned on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Accordingly, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so that backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and whether the timer value is 0 is determined. Is determined (step X12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or an EEPROM is permitted (step X13). ), OFF data is output to all output ports (set to a state where no output is provided) (step X14).

  Next, a serial port (a port mounted in the gaming microcomputer 111 in advance and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X15) and read first. It is determined whether the initialization switch has been turned on based on the state of the first input port 122 (step X16).

  When the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17). If (Step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (Step X18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19), and the calculated checksum and power failure (Step X20). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), the process shifts to step X21 in FIG. 15 to perform the process in the case of normal recovery from the power failure.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X23 in FIG. 15 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make

  In step X21 of FIG. 15, an initial value at the time of restoration from power failure is saved in an area to be initialized (step X21). The area to be initialized here is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. Note that the busy signal flag area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. The state is undefined. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state is changed to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

  After that, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X22). Go to X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X22, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. As the screen designation command, if the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in the usual processing described later, that is, if the special figure change display game is not being executed or is not in the special game state, if the customer is waiting, Send the command for the waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command for the recovery screen. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the process jumps from step X16, X17, X18, X20 to step X23, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step X23), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X24), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step X25). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X26). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to setting of the effect mode. Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X27), and the process proceeds to step X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X27, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (display a customer waiting demonstration screen, and light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) , A plurality of commands are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted.

  In step X28, a process of starting a timer interrupt signal and a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit for generating a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator provides a frequency dividing circuit for dividing the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step X28, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X29). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines By exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Alternatively, the user may be able to make any setting.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various initial value random numbers corresponding thereto (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining a hit symbol of a special figure) After saving as an initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) in a predetermined area of the RWM (step X30), interruption is permitted (step X31). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, making it difficult for the player to obtain unauthorized random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step X32) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are a timer interrupt process which is a processing unit of the program. The “low-speed counter” is updated based on the CTC output having the same cycle (a different CTC (CTC2) from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process). In addition, the so-called "initial value changing method" in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round in the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random-type update in which all values in the range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step X32, the number of times (for example, two times) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step X33). It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step X34). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X34; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step X32). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed. By allowing an interrupt (step X31) before the initial value random number updating process (step X32), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt is executed. Can be prevented from being squeezed by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update processing in step X32 may be a method of performing an initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing. In order to avoid the execution of the value random number updating process, when performing the initial value random number updating process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update process. It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks set in step X33 (step X35). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step X35; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step X34). If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (step X35; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily prohibiting interruption (step X36) is performed. The process of outputting the off data to the output port (Step X37) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X38), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X39). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off (step X40) and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step X41), a process of prohibiting access to the RWM (step X42). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. Thus, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power-off, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power-off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means ), The main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time.

  In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) If the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  In addition, the main control unit (game control device 100) stores a RAM 111C that can store data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C, so that the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits the access to the RAM 111C after the elapse of the standby time.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 16 shows the checksum calculation processing (steps X19 and X40) in the above-described main processing. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculation address (step X51), the number of repetitions is set (step X52), and "0" is set as the calculation value (step X53). . The number of bytes of the RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step X54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step X55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step X56), and the checksum is updated. It is determined whether the calculation has been completed (step X57). If the calculation has not been completed (N in step X57), the flow returns to step X54 to repeat the above processing. If the calculation has been completed (step X57: Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial random number update processing]
FIG. 17 shows an initial value random number update process (step X32) in the above-described main process. In the initial value random number updating process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X61), the small hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step X62), and the initial value random number updating process is ended. Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the big hit stop symbol in the special figure change display game, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is a special figure change display game. It is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines a small hit stop symbol. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be improved by continuing to increment the initial random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, the interrupt routine is started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 18 is started.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step X101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing for transferring a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main processing) to the RWM. Next, an upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and signal input, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step X103) are performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step X104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (upper winning opening solenoid 38b, lower winning opening solenoid 39b) and the like is performed. When a signal for stopping firing is output in step X5 in the main processing, a signal for permitting firing is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal is set to a permission state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the payout control device. At this time, no processing of the signal or the like is performed. The firing permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (the firing permission signal) indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both are permitted to fire, the game ball is configured to be able to fire.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (Step X105) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (Step X106), and a random number update process 2 (Step X107) are performed. Thereafter, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper winning port switch 38a, and the lower winning port switch 39a are monitored to determine whether a normal signal is input, and to monitor an error. A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (for example, whether the front frame or the glass frame is open) is performed (step X108).

  Next, a start-up switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring winning of the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a. In the starting port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port 36 or the second starting winning port 37. Then, special figure 1 game processing (step X110) for performing processing relating to the special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 game processing (step X111) for performing processing relating to the special figure 2 variable display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112) for driving a segment LED provided on the gaming machine 10 to display a special figure change display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, and the magnetic sensor 61 Inspection of magnet fraud (step X113), which checks the detection signal from the controller to determine whether there is any abnormality, and fraudulent radio wave, which checks the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality. A monitoring process (step X114) is performed. Further, an external information editing process (step X115) for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt return. Automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step X103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 19, in the input processing, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step X121). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the bit is cleared (step X122), and the state of the read input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step X122). X123).

Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the address of the second input port 123 is prepared (step X124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step X125).
Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X126), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X127), and switch reading processing (step X128) is performed.

Thereafter, the address of the input port 3, that is, the address of the third input port 124 is prepared (step X129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step X130).
Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X131), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X132), switch read processing (step X133) is performed, and the input processing is completed.

In this embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.
Further, as information on the unused bit data and the inverted bit data, information prepared corresponding to each input port is used.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps X128 and X133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step X141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the unused bit is cleared (step X142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is set. Is saved (step X144). Thereafter, it waits for the elapse of the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading (step X145).

  After the elapse of the delay time (0.1 ms), the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read for the second time (step X146). If there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the unused bit is cleared (step X147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X148), and the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is set. Is saved (stored) (step X149). Then, in the first and second readings, a defined bit pattern is created in which the same bit is set to 1 and the different bit is set to 0 (step X150), and the logical product of the determined bit pattern and the port input state 2 is obtained. It is set as a fixed bit (step X151).

  Next, in the first and second readings, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state is set to 0 and the different bit is set to 1 (step X152), and the logic of the undefined bit pattern and the determined state at the time of the previous interrupt is created. The product is taken and set as a previously held bit (step X153). This makes it possible to obtain a state of a signal from which noise due to switch chattering or the like has been removed. Then, the currently determined bit and the previously held bit are combined, saved as the currently determined state (step X154), and the exclusive OR of the previous and current determined states is calculated and saved as the rising edge (step X155). The switch reading process ends.

  When a timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once each time the interrupt is processed, and the signal is changed by comparing with the result of the previous read. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been performed. However, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that a correct determination may not be made. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, the above-described problem can be avoided.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step X104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, in the output processing, first, off data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 12) for outputting the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step X161). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 for outputting the data of the upper winning opening solenoid 38b and the lower winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (step X162).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X163), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the digit counter value is obtained (step X163). X164), and combines the acquired information with the external information data (step X165). The combined data is output to the digit output port 136 and the external information output port 137 (step X166). Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step X167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (step X168).

  Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and combined (step X169), the combined data and the output data of the emission permission are combined (step X170), and the combined data is used for external information output. Output to port 137 (step X171). Next, data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step X172). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step X173).

  Next, data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step X174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step X175). Then, data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 for outputting a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step X176), and the output processing ends.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission processing (step X105) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the payout command transmission processing, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize to which a payout command has not been transmitted yet. Winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (planned number of payouts) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). Winning data corresponding to a prize ball that has not been subjected to the main prize ball signal generation process in the area to be used is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout control device 200 outputs a payout prize ball signal to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By comparing these two signals, it is possible to monitor an illegal payout.

  In each of the winning number counter areas, a winning number counter area is provided for each number of prize balls set for each winning port (for example, three prize balls, ten prize balls, and fourteen prize balls). In addition, based on the winning in the winning opening, the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. Note that the winning number counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, the transmission of the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181), “0” is set in the winning number counter area to be checked among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls. It is determined whether there is a count number that is not. If there is no count number (step X181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X182), and it is determined whether the check of the count numbers of all the winning number counter areas has been completed. (Step X183). If it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step X183; Y), the process proceeds to step X192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X183; N), the process returns to step X181 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in step X181 that there is a count number (step X181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (−1) (step X184), and the target winning number counter is determined. The number of payouts corresponding to the area is obtained (step X185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added to make a new prize ball remaining number (step X186), and saved in the prize ball remaining area (step X187). As a value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that is less than a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, a predetermined number 10 serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the addition result (step X188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189). If the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step X189; N), the process proceeds to step X192. In this case, since the result of the subtraction is not saved in the prize ball remaining area, the value before the subtraction is stored in the prize ball remaining area. If the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189; Y), the value of the main award ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (step X190), and the subtraction result is saved in the remaining award ball area (step X191). , And return to step X188.

  As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls during a big hit or the like is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed together with the payout of the game balls, and the accurate It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of award balls cannot be counted.

  In step X192, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (step X193). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step X193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. In other words, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control. The payout busy signal flag is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal. Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an undefined state in which the state is undefined is set.

  Note that the undefined state is set by clearing the busy signal flag area in the processing at the time of power-on, for example. The indefinite state is that an idle state or a busy state is set based on that the state of the payout busy signal is maintained for a predetermined period of time to indicate that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be performed. To eliminate. In other words, when a power failure occurs and the vehicle returns from the power failure, even if the payout control device 200 outputs a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started, the prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. Instead of transmitting, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 being continuously output over a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 reliably receives the prize ball command and immediately recognizes that the payout process is possible, and then transmits the prize ball command, so that the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. Can be prevented from being refused.

  If the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. In this case, it is determined that the apparatus is busy even when the state is undefined. As described above, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command is not performed. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  If the payout busy signal flag is not busy (step X194; N), it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195). In the process of checking whether or not the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step X195), “0” is set in the winning number counter area to be checked among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for the number of winning balls. It is determined whether there is a count number that is not.

  If there is no count in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X196), and the addresses of all the winning number counter areas are updated. It is determined whether the check of the count number has been completed (step X197). If it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step X197; Y), the payout command transmission processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step X197; N), the process returns to step X195 and repeats the above processing.

  If it is determined in step X195 that there is a count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step X195). X198), and obtains a payout command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 (step X199). Then, the acquired command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step X200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step X201), and the payout command transmission processing is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. Prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means when the prize ball command is issued.

  As described above, since the game control device 100 performs the control of transmitting the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, the prize is provided only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. A ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winning that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that the data is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and the data is backed up on the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function for performing the payout.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2000-327759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control apparatus 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on this data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a backup function, which leads to an increase in cost. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without having a function for backing up in the payout control device 200.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The timing can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed comprehensively, and the prize areas (the first start prize port 36, the second start prize port 37, the general prize port 35, the first special variable prize apparatus 38) provided in the game area 32 are provided. A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to the second special variable winning device 39), and a game based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. A payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing a payout control of a ball, wherein the game control means outputs a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control. A state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power outage. Is output Even if it does not immediately transmit the prize ball command to the payout control means, in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means continuously output over a predetermined period, This means that the award ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In the game area 32, a prize area having a different number of prize balls (first start prize port 36, second start prize port 37, general prize port 35, first special variable prize apparatus 38, second special variable prize apparatus 39) is provided. A plurality of game control means (game control device 100) are provided with a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying, for each number of prize balls, whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls has not been transmitted. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an untransmitted prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). So that the state signal determines whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control before specifying whether or not there is an untransmitted prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. That's what you do.

  In addition, the game control is performed in a comprehensive manner, and a predetermined prize area (a first start prize port 36, a second start prize port 37, a general prize port 35, a first special variable prize apparatus 38, a second special variable prize apparatus 39). ), A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball, and a payout control for controlling payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. (Payout control device 200), and the game control means can start the payout control based on a state signal output from the payout control means and indicating whether the payout control means can start the payout control. And a prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means, and the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with a prize of a game ball in a predetermined prize area. Prize ball with information about External information output means (game control device 100) for outputting a number (main prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, wherein the external information output means outputs a state signal output from the payout control means to the payout control means. Is to output the prize ball signal regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

  The prize-ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) immediately transmits the prize-ball command when the power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. Is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that the information is transmitted to the payout control means.

  The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information related to a prize ball command, and a prize capable of storing information related to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) is provided with a predetermined winning area (first starting winning port 36, second starting winning port 37, general winning port 35). The first special variable prize device 38 and the second special variable prize device 39) generate a prize ball command in units of one prize, and if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, Is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) receives information on the prize in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area. Is memorable By updating when a game ball is awarded to a predetermined winning area, and updating in accordance with transmission to the award ball command to the payout control means, the number of award ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored. The external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area, and outputs a prize ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is capable of storing information on the prize in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area, and updates when a game ball is prize in the predetermined prize area, By updating in accordance with the cumulative processing of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not yet been subjected to the cumulative processing.

[Random number update processing 1]
FIG. 23 shows a random number update process 1 (step X106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In the random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X221).

  If the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224). When the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; Y), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X222), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is corresponded. Is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding a start value of a random number counter (random number area) to be executed (step X223). Thereafter, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).

  When the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended. When the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; Y), the small hit symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X225), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step X226), and the random number update processing 1 ends.

[Random number update processing 2]
FIG. 24 shows a random number update process 2 (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). The random number update process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are a 1-byte random number (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and a 2-byte random number (variable pattern random number 1) as the variable pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for the upper byte and the lower byte at different interrupts. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (the random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to:

  In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step X231). Next, an address of an effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step X232). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is obtained from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step X233). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether the random number has completed one cycle.

  Subsequently, for example, the value of the M1 counter provided in the game microcomputer in the present embodiment is loaded (step X234). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to random numbers. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is obtained and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step X235). The mask value is different from the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 are updated. Is set in the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. When updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area (random number counter) is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; Y), the value remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as an added value (hereinafter, this is referred to as The mask update value is set by adding “1” to the masked value, and the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step X237), and the process proceeds to step X239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as an addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step X236). X238), and proceeds to step X239. The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value sometimes becomes “0”, and if “0” is added later, the value does not change from the value before the addition, so that it is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step X239; Y), a value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step X240). , The process proceeds to step X242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step X239; N), “0” is set as the upper byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) is set as the lower byte of the random number value. ) Is set (step X241), and the process proceeds to step X242.

  In step X242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step X237 or X238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value obtained in step X233 (step X242). X243). If the new random value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (Step X243; N), the new random value is saved in a lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (Step X245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as a new new random value (step X244), and this value is set to 1 It saves in the random number area below the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step X245).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246). If the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step X246; N), the random number updating process 2 ends. If it is a 2-byte random number (step X246; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, its value) is saved in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step X247). ), And the random number update processing 2 ends.

  In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the activation area of the first activation winning port 36 or the second activation winning port 37. Of random number updating means for updating the variation pattern random number for determining the random number.

[Winning port switch / status monitoring processing]
FIG. 25 shows the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). In the winning port switch / state monitoring process, first, the winning port monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the upper winning port switches 38a in the upper winning port (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step X301). In spite of the fact that the special winning opening is not open, the special winning opening is monitored for any illegal winning, and a fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning is executed (step X302).

  The winning opening monitoring table (fraud monitoring table) includes a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of a fraud winning number area, a fraud winning error. A notification command, an illegal winning number upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determinations), an address of a winning opening switch table, and information of notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. The winning opening switch table defines information on the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), monitoring switch bits, the address of the winning number counter area 1, and the address of the winning number counter area 2. As these fraud monitoring tables and winning tables, those corresponding to the respective switches to be monitored are prepared.

  After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower winning opening switch 39a in the lower winning opening (the second special variable winning device 39) is prepared (step X303), and it is monitored for an illegal winning. A fraud & winning monitoring process (step X304) for detecting a normal winning is executed. Next, a winning port monitoring table for winning port switches (here, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the general winning port 35) is prepared (step X305). Is updated (step X306). Then, a special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process for monitoring the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state scheduled to be executed mainly with the special figure 1 variable display game is performed (step X307).

  Next, the status scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the switches and signals whose status is to be monitored and which signal is to be monitored this time is updated (step X308). This state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, a gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X309). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X310) for determining whether an error has occurred or not is performed.

  By referencing the value of the state scan counter to the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, if the value of the state scan counter is 0, it is possible to monitor the state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of a disconnection of a switch connector. If the value is set and the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state based on the shot-out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the abnormal payment status signal is set.

  Next, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting a state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter is prepared (step X311). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X312) for determining whether an error has occurred or not is performed.

  When the value of the state scan counter is 0, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch is set by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, and the state scan is performed. When the value of the counter is 1, monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the frame radio signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the state scan counter is 0 (step X313). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X313; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X313; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step X314), and the gaming machine state check for determining whether an error has occurred or not is performed. The processing (step X315) is performed.

  By referencing the value of the state scan counter to the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, monitoring of the state based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection of the switch or the like is performed. Is set. Note that the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, the payout control device 200 performs a payout busy signal check process (step X316) for setting a busy signal flag based on a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control can be started, and ends the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. I do. Note that the processing of steps X314 to X316 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed once every four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing of steps X314 to X316 is performed every 16 ms.

[Illegal & winning surveillance processing]
FIG. 26 shows the fraudulent & winning monitoring process (steps X302 and X304) in the winning port switch / status monitoring process described above. This fraudulent & winning monitoring process is a process performed for each of the two upper winning port switches 38a of the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower winning port switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39. As for the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning devices 38 and 39), it is easy to forcibly open the opening / closing door and insert a game ball to pay out a prize ball. .

  In the fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be monitored for error is checked (step X321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step X322). The irregularity monitoring period is a period other than during the special game state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning switch for error monitoring is the upper winning switch 38a. When the switch is the lower special winning opening switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special game state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened.

  If it is during the fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332). If there is an input at the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step X324), and the added illegal winning number is added to the monitoring target fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5) (step X325).

  The reason why the determination number is set to five is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the game ball is in the valid period of the large winning opening switch. This is to prevent a case where a prize is passed after passing through or a noise is put on a signal from being determined to be invalid, and that it is not easily determined to be an error though it is not invalid.

  If the number does not exceed the determination number (step X325; N), a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330). If the number exceeds the determined number (step X325; Y), the number of illegal winnings is kept at the number of determined fraud occurrence (step X326), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area (step X325). X327). Next, a target fraud command is prepared (step X328), a fraud prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step X329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), a winning port monitoring table of the target winning port switch is prepared (step X330), and a winning number counter updating process for setting a winning ball (step X331) is performed. . Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332), and it is determined whether the update of the notification timer is permitted (step X333). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step X333; N), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. When the update of the notification timer is permitted (step X333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X334). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning-monitoring switch to be monitored for error is one upper winning switch 38a, and is permitted when the winning-switch for error monitoring is the other winning switch 38a. Not done. This prevents the notification timer from being updated twice as frequently with regard to the fraudulent notification regarding the first special variable winning device 38, thereby preventing the time from being increased by half the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . If the winning switch for error monitoring is the lower winning switch 39a, the updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335). If the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, a target fraud release command is prepared (step X336), and the fraud prize release flag is set as a fraud flag. Prepare (step X337). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).

  When the value of the notification timer has become 0 (step X338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer has become 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( (Step X339), and compares the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (Step X340). If the value of the notification timer has become 0 at the moment when the value of the notification timer has become 0 (step X338; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer has become 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is set as a target. The value is compared with the value in the invalid flag area (step X340).

  If the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process ends. If the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area do not match (step X340; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step X341), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step X342), the fraudulent and winning monitoring process is terminated. With the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an unauthorized winning error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is released, and the start and end of the error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
FIG. 27 shows a winning number counter updating process (steps X306 and X331) in the winning port switch / status monitoring process and the fraud & winning monitoring process described above. In the winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening switch table of the winning opening monitoring table (step X351), and input to the target winning opening switch (exactly, a change in the input). ) Is determined (step X352).

  If there is no input (step X352: N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X362). If there is an input (step X352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X354), and it is determined whether or not an overflow occurs (step X354). Step X355). If no overflow has occurred (step X355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step X356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357). ). If an overflow has occurred (Step X355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (Step X357).

  After loading the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (step X357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X358), and it is determined whether or not overflow occurs (step X359). If no overflow has occurred (step X359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361). ), It is determined whether the monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X362). If an overflow has occurred (step X359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X362).

  If the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step X362; N), the process returns to the processing (step X352) for determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is ended. Through the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Direction command setting processing]
FIG. 28 shows the effect command setting process (step X342) in the above-described fraud & winning monitoring process. This effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X371), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X372).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X372; Y), the process returns to step X371. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X372; N), the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written into the serial transmission buffer for effect (step X373), and the status of the serial transmission buffer is read (step X374). , It is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X375).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X375; Y), the process returns to step X374. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X375; N), the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written into the effect serial transmission buffer (step X376), and the effect command setting process ends.

  As described above, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the load on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the command analysis can be made difficult. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced, and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, it is not necessary to capture commands in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing]
FIG. 29 shows the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing (step X307) in the above described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, but the player who does not know this. It is also conceivable that a player who intentionally aims to execute the special figure 2 variable display game makes a right strike. In the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process, a process is performed for notifying such a player as to make a left-handed strike.

  Here, the abnormal fluctuation means an irregular fluctuation which is a non-primary special figure fluctuation display game. Even in the normal gaming state, it is possible to win the second starting winning port 37, so even if the irregular fluctuation is a valid special figure fluctuation display game, use of a game ball or magnet with a thread, radio wave This is different from a fraudulent act of executing a special figure change display game by detecting a prize illegally by launching a special game. However, it is not preferable to continue to execute the special figure fluctuation display game that is not the special figure fluctuation display game that is determined to be the main in the design of the gaming machine, and here, such irregular fluctuation is detected. The corresponding processing is performed.

  In this special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is a special figure 1 change check flag (step X381). The special figure 1 check flag is a flag set when the special figure 1 variable display game is started in a low probability state. If there is no special figure 1 change check flag (step X381; N), it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 change check flag (step X387). If there is a special figure 1 change check flag (step X381; Y), the special figure 1 change check flag is cleared (step X382), and the number of change of the special figure 1 is updated by +1 (step X383).

  Then, it is determined whether the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 is smaller than a specified value (for example, 18) (step X384), and if it is smaller than the specified value (step X384; Y), it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag. A determination is made (step X387). If the value is larger than the specified value (step X384; N), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number added by executing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal game state (low probability state) must be zero. For example, -1 is updated (step X385), the number of changes in the special figure 1 is cleared to 0 (step X386), and it is determined whether there is a change check flag for the special figure 2 (step X387). Note that the minimum value of the number of abnormal changes in the special figure 2 is set to 0.

  The special figure 2 check flag is a flag set when the special figure 2 variable display game is started in a low probability state. In determining whether there is a special figure 2 change check flag (step X387), if there is no special figure 2 change check flag (step X387; N), the flow shifts to step X390. If there is a special figure 2 check flag (step X387; Y), the special figure 2 change check flag is cleared (step X388), and the number of abnormal figure 2 abnormal changes is updated by +1 (step X389). (2) It is determined whether the abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than a specified value (for example, 5) (step X390).

  If the special figure 2 abnormal change number is not smaller than the specified value (step X390; N), the specified value -1 is set to the special figure 2 abnormal change number (step X391), and the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer is initialized. A value (for example, 60000 ms) is set (step X392). Next, a special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag is prepared (step X393), a special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence command is prepared (step X394), and the flow shifts to step X399. In this case, although the player is in the normal game state (low probability state) in which it is recommended that the player play a left-handed game mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game, the player makes a right-handed game. FIG. 2 shows a case where the variable display game is being executed, in which a process is performed for notifying the player to make a left-handed hit.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 2 abnormal change number is smaller than the specified value (step X390; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer is updated by -1 (step X395), and it is determined whether the time is up (step X396). ). If the time is not up (Step X396; N), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process ends. If the time is up (step X396; Y), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation canceling flag is prepared (step X397), and a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation canceling command is prepared (step X398).

  Then, it is determined whether the prepared flag is the same as the current value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step X399). Then, when the prepared flag is the same as the current value of the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (step X399; Y), that is, when there is no change in the state, the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process is ended. If the prepared flag and the current value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area are not the same (step X399; N), that is, if the state has changed, the prepared flag is set to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation canceling flag. Is determined (step X400).

  If the prepared flag is not the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag (step X400; N), that is, if it is a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step X400). X402), effect command setting processing is performed, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing ends. On the other hand, if the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation canceling flag (step X400; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (step X401), and the processing of steps X402 and X403 is performed. (Step X403), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process ends. With the above processing, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the production control device 300 in response to the detection of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation canceling command is issued in response to the release of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation. 300, the start and end of the special figure 2 abnormal change notification are set.

  FIG. 30 and FIG. 31 show an example of processing by the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing accompanying the progress of the game. In the example shown in FIG. 30, in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 abnormal change number is 3, and the special figure 1 change number is 15. When the next special figure 1 change display game is started from this state (t11), the special figure 1 change number changes from 15 to 16. Also, when the special figure 2 change display game is started (t12), the special figure 2 abnormal change number changes from 3 to 4.

  Thereafter, each time the special figure 1 change display game is started, the special figure 1 change number is updated by +1 (t13, t14). Here, when the special figure 1 change number reaches the specified value of 18 (t14), the special figure 2 abnormal change number is updated by −1 and changes from 4 to 3, and the special figure 1 change number is cleared to 0. You. Similarly, every time the special figure 1 change display game is started, the special figure 1 change number is updated by +1 (t15 to t17), and when the special figure 1 change number reaches the specified value of 18 (t17), The special figure 2 abnormal change number is updated by −1 and changes from 3 to 2, and the special figure 1 change number is cleared to 0. That is, each time the specified number (here, 18 times) of the special figure 1 change display game is executed, the special figure 2 abnormal change number is subtracted.

  FIG. 31 shows a case where the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is performed. In this example, in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is three. When the special figure 2 change display game is started from this state (t21), the special figure 2 abnormal change number is updated from 3 to 4. Further, when the special figure 2 change display game is started (t22), the special figure 2 abnormal change number reaches 5 which is the specified value.

  As a result, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved, and the output of external information indicating that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred and the gaming machine error state signal to a device outside the gaming machine is started based on the flag, It is possible to grasp the occurrence of the abnormal change of the special figure 2 by the management device of the game store or the like. In addition, a special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence command is transmitted to effect controller 300. Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 notifies the fact that the abnormal change of the special figure 2 has occurred by display or sound.

  In addition, the time of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is started from the point in time when the number of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuations reaches the specified value of 5 (t22), and a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses ( t23), the abnormal figure of the special figure 2 is cleared to 0, and the output of the external information and the gaming machine error state signal is stopped. Further, the special figure 2 abnormal change cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 ends the notification that the special figure 2 abnormal change has occurred.

  It should be noted that the special figure 2 abnormal change number is set to a specified value -1 (here, 4) after reaching the specified value (here, 5) and determining that the special figure 2 abnormal change has occurred. Therefore, when the special figure 2 change display game is newly started before the lapse of the predetermined time, the number of changes in the special figure 2 becomes the specified value, and the counting of the predetermined time is newly started from that time. As a result, when the special figure 2 change display game is executed despite the fact that the special figure 2 abnormal change has occurred, the notification period is extended accordingly.

  In this way, by determining that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred based on the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaching the specified value (for example, 5), for example, the game ball enters the right game area unintentionally. Thus, when the second starting winning opening 37 is won, it is possible to prevent the determination that the abnormal state is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation immediately. Furthermore, by executing the special figure 1 change display game a predetermined number of times, the special figure 2 abnormal change number is subtracted, so that the special figure 2 abnormal change that occurs in the unintended second start winning opening 37 is achieved. The number will be canceled if the player subsequently plays the game, and it is possible to prevent a mere mistake or the result of the game of another player from accumulating and determining that the figure is an abnormal fluctuation.

  Note that the specified value of the special figure 2 abnormal change number for performing the special figure 2 abnormal change notification and the specified value of the special figure 1 change number for performing the process of subtracting the special figure 2 abnormal change number are arbitrarily set. Can be set. Each prescribed value set here may be any value as long as it can prevent the player from aiming at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state. When a power failure occurs and recovery is performed, monitoring is restarted from the state before the power failure occurred. Even when the special figure 2 abnormal change notification is performed, the payout of the prize ball for the winning is performed as usual.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 32 shows the gaming machine state check processing (steps X310, X312, X315) in the above described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. In this gaming machine state check processing, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is obtained (step X451), and it is determined whether a signal to be monitored is on (step X452).

  The status monitoring table defines information corresponding to the status scan counter. This information includes, for example, the lower address of the head address of the state monitoring area, the lower address of the port input state area of the switch control area in which the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bit of the target signal, the signal Judgment data of ON, status OFF command (in the case of an error, an error notification end command is performed), status ON command (in the case of an error, an error notification start command is performed), status OFF monitoring timer comparison value, status ON monitoring timer Contains the comparison value.

  If the target signal is not on (step X452: N), a state-off flag is prepared as a state flag (step X453), and a target state-off command is acquired and prepared (step X454). After that, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X455), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459). The case where the target signal is not on (step X452: N) is a state in which an error-related signal indicates that there is no error (normal), and a signal from the touch switch indicates that touch is not performed. is there.

  On the other hand, when the target signal is ON (step X452: Y), a state ON flag is prepared as a state flag (step X456), and a target state ON command is acquired and prepared (step X457). After that, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X458), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459). The case where the target signal is ON (step X452: Y) is a state indicating that an error-related signal indicates an error (abnormal or invalid), and a signal from the touch switch indicates that a touch is made. It is a state which shows.

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step X459; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462). Then, it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step X459; N), that is, if the signal state has changed, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step X460). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step X461), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462), and it is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X462). Step X463).

  If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463; N), the gaming machine state check processing ends. When the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463: Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1 and is kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step X464). The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step X465).

  If the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step X465; Y), the game machine state check processing ends. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step X465; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step X466), and the production command setting process is performed. (Step X467) to end the gaming machine state check processing. Thereby, the state-off command prepared in step X454 or the state-on command prepared in step X457 is transmitted to effect control device 300.

[Payment busy signal check processing]
FIG. 33 shows the payout busy signal check processing (step X316) in the above described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step X471). Note that the payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is not on (step X471; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X472), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X473). If the payout busy signal is ON (step X471; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X474), and an ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X475). .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal state area is the same as the state of the current signal, that is, whether or not there is a change in on / off (step X476). If the value is the same (step X476; Y), The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479). If not the same (step X476; N), the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area (step X477), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step X478), and the busy signal monitoring timer is reset. +1 is updated (step X479).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is larger than the comparison value of the on-determination monitoring timer or the comparison value of the off-determination monitoring timer set in advance, that is, whether the signal confirmation time (for example, 32 ms) has been reached (step). X480).
If the signal determination time has not been reached (step X480; N), the payout busy signal check process ends. If the signal determination time has been reached (step X480; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by −1, and the previously set ON determination monitoring timer comparison value or OFF determination monitoring timer comparison value of −1 is subtracted. (Step X481), the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (Step X482), and the payout busy signal check processing ends.

  By this processing, a busy signal flag is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately when the state of the payout busy signal changes, and the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, so that noise And so on.

  Further, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and becomes an indefinite state until any signal state continues for the signal determination time. With this, when a power failure occurs and the vehicle returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. In response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 being continuously output over a predetermined period, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 reliably receives the prize ball command and immediately recognizes that the payout process is possible, and then transmits the prize ball command, so that the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. Can be prevented from being refused.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the start-up switch monitoring process (step X109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the starting port switch monitoring processing, first, a starting port 1 (first starting winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and a hard random number acquisition processing is performed (step X492). Then, it is determined whether or not there is start-port winning information that is set when the jackpot random number is obtained based on the winning in the first starting winning port 36 in the hard random number obtaining process (step X493).

  If the start opening winning information is not set based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, the information on no winning at the start opening is set. On the other hand, when the information regarding the presence of the starting opening winning is set based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether or not the low probability is in progress (step X494). If it is during the low probability (step X494; Y), the process proceeds to step X497. If the probability is not low (step X494; N), a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X496). After that, a table for setting the information of holding by the starting port 1 is prepared (step X497), and the special figure starting port 1 switch processing is performed (step X498).

  The effect control device 300 performs right-handed instruction notification for instructing the player to perform right-handed by display or sound based on receiving the right-handed instruction notification command. When the player is in the high probability state, the right-handed player is more advantageous for the player. A right-hand instruction is notified.

  Next, a start-up opening 2 (second start-up winning opening 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X499), and a hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X500). It is determined whether or not there is start opening winning information set when acquired (step X501).

  If the information on the presence of the start opening winning has not been set based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 37 (step X501; N), the start opening switch monitoring processing is ended. In this case, the information on no winning at the start opening is set. On the other hand, when the information on the start opening winning is set based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 37 (step X501; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in a high probability (step X502). If the probability is high (step X502; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If it is not during the high probability (step X502; N), it is determined whether it is during the big hit, that is, the first special game state which is the special game state based on the big hit (step X503).

  When the big hit is in progress (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If it is not during the big hit (step X503; N), it is determined whether the high-probability final fluctuation is being performed (step X504). The term “high probability final fluctuation” means that the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) from the end of the first special game state (including the stop time), and the lottery is performed in the high probability state. Is running in the last special figure change display game.

  If the high-probability final fluctuation is being performed (step X504; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If it is not during the high-probability final change (step X504; N), a left-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step X505), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X506). Thereafter, a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 2 is prepared (step X507), the special figure starting port 2 switch processing is performed (step X508), and the starting port switch monitoring processing is ended.

  In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the left-turn instruction notification command, the left-turn instruction is instructed to instruct the player to make a left-turn by display, voice, or the like. When the player is in the low-probability state, left-handing is more advantageous to the player, and when a winning is detected in the low-probability state at the second starting winning opening 37 which is configured not to win if the player does not right-hand. A left-hand instruction is notified.

  In the first special game state, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened except for some types of big hits, so that the left-turn instruction is not notified even in the low probability state. In addition, in the special figure variation display game that is executed last in the high probability state, the state is changed to the low probability state after the lottery at the start of the game, so the state is the low probability state during the game, but the game is in the high probability state. Since the determination is made based on the probability state, there is a high possibility that a special game state will occur. In addition, until the end of the game, a special game state is performed, so that the left-hand instruction is not notified.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
FIG. 35 illustrates a hard random number acquisition process (steps X492 and X500) in the above-described start-up switch monitoring process. In this hard random number acquisition processing, first, information on no start-up winning is set (step X511), and it is determined whether there is an input to the target switch (step X512).

  If there is no input to the target switch (step X512; N), the hard random number acquisition processing ends. If there is an input to the target switch (step X512; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step X513), and it is determined whether the target random number latch register has latch data (step X514).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; N), the hard random number acquisition processing ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; Y), the extracted big hit random number is loaded and prepared in the target hard random number latch register (step X515). Then, the start-up winning information is set (step X516), and the hard random number acquisition process ends.

[Special figure starting port 1 switch processing]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure starting port 1 switch processing (step X498) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing. In this special figure starting port 1 switch processing, first, the number of times of outputting the starting port signal 1 which is the number of times of outputting information on the number of winnings to the first starting winning port 36 to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 is loaded. Then, the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (step X523). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the start-up port signal 1 output number area of the RWM (step X524), and the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) Is smaller than the upper limit (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of outputs can be stored up to 255, but if the number of outputs is stored up to the upper limit, the value is updated to +1 and loops to 0, so that the updated value is not saved.

  If the number of special figure 1 reservations is less than the upper limit value (here, 4) (step X525; Y), a special figure 1 information setting flag used for allocating a fluctuation pattern in the special figure reservation information determination processing described later is set ( (Step X526), the special figure 1 reservation number is updated by +1 (step X527). Next, the address of a random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 1 is calculated (step X528), and the jackpot random number prepared in the above-described hard random number acquisition process is converted to the big hit random number of RWM. Save in the storage area (step X529).

  Then, the big hit symbol random numbers are extracted and prepared (step X530), and are saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X532). Subsequently, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). Then, special figure reservation information determination processing (step X534), which is pre-reading processing, is performed, and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step X535), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X535). Step X536), the special figure starting port 1 switch processing ends. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) can extract a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning port 36, and can store the predetermined random number as a first starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit value. A first start storage means is provided.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure holding information determination processing (steps X534 and X575) in the above-described special figure starting port 1 switch processing and the following special figure starting port 2 switch processing. The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead processing for determining the result related information corresponding to the special figure start storage before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the special figure start storage. In this special figure suspension information determination processing, first, it is determined whether the processing target is special figure 1 (step X540), and if it is not special figure 1 (step X540; N), that is, if the processing target is special figure 2 Moves to step X543. If the processing target is special figure 1 (step X540; Y), it is determined whether the state is in the high probability state (step X541). If the processing object is in the high probability state (step X541; Y), the special figure is determined. The diagram pending information determination processing ends. If it is not in the high probability state (step X541; N), it is determined whether it is in the middle of a big hit, that is, in the first special game state which is a special game state based on the big hit (step X542).

  When the big hit is in progress (step X542; Y), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends. If it is not during the big hit (step X542; N), a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is a big hit based on whether the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value (step X543). If the result of the determination is a big hit (step X544; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546). A pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is a small hit based on whether or not the big random number value matches the small hit determination value (step X547). ). If the result of the determination is a small hit (step X548; Y), stop symbol information for the small hit is set (step X549), and a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the result of the determination is not a small hit (step X548; N), stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step X550), and a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  After preparing a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551), effect command setting processing is performed (step X552). Next, special figure information setting processing (step X553) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and special figure fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed. (Step X554).

  Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step X555), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step X556), the special figure suspension information judgment processing ends. In the special figure information setting process in step X553 and the special figure variation pattern setting process in step X554, when the processing target is special figure 1, the special figure 1 variation display processing is performed in the special figure 1 variation start processing of the special figure 1 normal processing. This is the same as the processing executed at the start of the game, and when the processing target is the special figure 2, the processing executed at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is the special figure 2 variable start processing of the special figure 2 normal processing. The same is true.

  With the above processing, the look-ahead stop symbol command including the result of the special figure change display game based on the special figure start memory, and the look-ahead change pattern command including the information of the change pattern in the special figure change display game based on the special figure start memory Is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the determination result (pre-reading result) of the result-related information (whether a big hit or a small hit or the type of a fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the special figure start memory is stored in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding special figure start memory. The effect can be notified to the effect control device 300 before the start timing, and particularly by changing the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41, etc., before the start timing of the special figure change display game. It becomes possible to notify the player of the result-related information.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a determination unit that can determine the result and the variation mode information of the variable display game before the start of the variable display game, based on the start memory stored in the start storage unit. In addition, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start memory in the start winning storage device (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Or the like). In addition, the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning where the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good. Note that the special figure suspension information determination processing may be performed only for the special figure 1 variable display game and not performed for the special figure 2 variable display game.

  Further, in the special figure 1 variable display game, the prefetching process is not performed when the high probability is in progress. This is a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly performed during the high probability state, and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly deviated by the special result derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because it is almost always stopped at. That is, there is little meaning in the notification of the pre-read result because most of the results are missed, or the foreseeing result can be changed by forcibly changing the pre-read result to be a special result in the special figure 1 change display game and then changing to the out-of-result result. This is because a contradiction may occur.

  However, for the special figure 2 variable display game in the low probability state, the start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not generated, so the first start memory exists in the first period of the specific game state. It is highly likely that only the special figure 1 variable display game will be played, and in such a case, a prefetch effect may be performed for the first start memory. Of the first start memories that perform such a prefetching effect, those that occurred before the start of the specific game state are used for those that occurred before the start of the specific game state, and those that occurred after the start of the specific game state were used because the results of the prefetch processing were performed. The prefetching process is performed on the target of such prefetching effect. Of course, the pre-reading process may be performed irrespective of the probability state, and it may be determined in another process whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect based on the result of the pre-reading process.

[Special figure starting port 2 switch processing]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure startup port 2 switch processing (step X508) in the above-described startup port switch monitoring processing. In this special figure starting port 2 switch processing, first, the starting port signal 2 output number, which is the number of times information about the number of winnings to the second starting winning port 37 is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10, is loaded. Then, the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X562), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (step X563). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the region of the number of outputs of the start port signal 2 of the RWM (step X564), and whether the upper limit value of the second start memory is 0 or not. Is determined.

  The second start memory can be changed between 0 and 4. In the low probability state, it is set to 0, and the second start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game does not occur. However, in this case, if there is a winning in the second starting winning opening 37 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the second starting memory is temporarily generated for the sake of processing. However, the second start memory is immediately consumed.

  In the high probability state, a value from 0 to 4 is set. As will be described later, the upper limit is set to 4 with the start of the high probability state (specific game state), and is controlled to be 0 in a predetermined period before the end of the high probability state. When the upper limit is 1 to 4, a second start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is generated in the same manner as the first start memory. When the upper limit value is 0, the second start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not generated as in the low probability state.

  If the upper limit value is not 0 (step X565; Y), it is determined whether the number of special figure 2 reservations (second start storage number) is less than the upper limit value (step X566). If the number of reserved special figure 2 is less than the upper limit value (step X566; Y), the special figure 2 information setting flag used for allocating the variation pattern in the above-described special figure reservation information determination processing is set (step X567). In FIG. 2, the number of reservations is updated by +1 (step X568). Next, the address of the random number storage area (the random number storage area for the special figure 2) corresponding to the reserved number of the special figure 2 is calculated (step X569), and the big random number prepared in the above-described hard random number acquisition processing is converted to the big random number of the RWM. Save in the storage area (step X570).

  Then, the big hit symbol random numbers are extracted and prepared (step X571), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X572). Further, a small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X573). Subsequently, the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X574). Note that the variation pattern random number 1 is not used for the special figure 2 variation display game because there are few types of variation patterns.

  Then, a special figure reservation information determination process (step X575), which is a pre-reading process, is performed, a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is prepared (step X576), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X576). X577), the special figure starting port 2 switch process ends. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) can extract a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning port 37, and can store the predetermined random number as a second starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit value. A second start storage means is provided.

  On the other hand, when the upper limit value is 0 (step X565; Y), it is determined whether or not the winning opening 2 (second starting winning opening 37) winning is invalid (step X578). The starting port 2 winning invalidity means that the special figure 1 variable display game which has a special result (big hit or small hit) is stopped (during a special figure displaying process described later), during the first or second special game state, and The special figure 2 change display game is being executed. When the winning opening 2 winning is invalid (step X578; Y), the special figure starting opening 2 switch process is terminated. If the winning opening 2 is not invalid (step X578; N), the number of reserved special figure 2 is set to 1 (step X579), and the address of the random number storage area for the special figure 2 is set (step X580). ), The big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step X581).

  Then, the big hit symbol random numbers are extracted and prepared (step X582), and are saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X583). Further, a small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X584). Subsequently, the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X585), and the special figure starting port 2 switch processing ends. That is, the game control device 100 forms a starting winning storage unit that extracts and stores a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 37.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X110) in the timer interrupt process described above. The control of the entire process related to the special figure 1 variable display game and the setting of the display of the special figure 1 are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, first, whether the special figure 2 is in the big hit / small hit, that is, in the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit Is determined (step Y101).

  If the special figure 2 is not in the big hit / small hit (step Y101; N), a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, −1 is updated (step Y103). ). If the big hit / small hit in the special map 2 is being performed (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y103.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is played by the upper special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Performs processing to monitor detection. In the special figure 1 game process, a special winning state switch monitoring process is performed for a special game state executed when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in a special figure 2 game process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the flow shifts to step Y119 to perform the subsequent processing. If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time has already expired, the processing branches to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. Is set in the register (step Y105). Then, by using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is obtained (step Y106), and a subroutine call based on the special figure 1 game processing number is performed (step Y107).

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “0”, the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure 1 FIG. 1 performs a special process 1 routine process (step Y108) for setting information necessary for performing the process during fluctuation. If the special figure 1 game processing number is “1” in step Y107, the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 1 display is performed. The process during one fluctuation (step Y109) is performed.

  In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the big hit type and the setting of each big hit type The special figure 1 displaying process (step Y110) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is “3” in step Y107, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the update of the opening number, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening processing, and the like are performed. The processing of the fanfare / interval to be performed (step Y111) is performed. In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, while an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round. A special winning opening opening process (step Y112) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “5”, if the big hit round is the last round, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening or the special figure 1 A special winning port remaining ball process (step Y113) for setting information necessary for performing the jackpot end process is performed. If the special figure 1 game processing number is “6” in step Y107, the special figure 1 big hit end processing (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y108) I do.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "7" in step Y107, the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hit are performed. During the small hit fanfare (step Y115), the information necessary for the setting is set. If the special figure 1 game processing number is "8" in step Y107, a small hitting middle processing (step Y116) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is “9” in step Y107, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining sphere winning in the big winning opening during the small hitting processing, or the processing for ending the small hitting A small hit remaining sphere process (step Y117) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure 1 game processing number is “10” in step Y107, special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y118) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 ordinary processing is performed.

  Thereafter, a special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and a symbol change control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. FIG. 1 The game processing ends. The special figure 1 game process performs a series of execution control for the first variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special figure 2 game processing]
FIG. 40 shows the special figure 2 game process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 2 game process, the control of the entire processing relating to the special figure 2 variable display game and the setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 game processing for the special figure 2.

  In the special figure 2 game process, first, whether the special figure 1 is in the big hit / small hit, that is, in the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit Is determined (step Y131). If it is not during the big hit / small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y131; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, the value is updated by -1 ( Step Y133). If the big hit / small hit in the special map 1 is being performed (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y133.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is played by the upper special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Performs processing to monitor detection. In the special figure 2 game process, the special winning state switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 1 game process described above.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the flow shifts to step Y152 to perform the subsequent processing. If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 or not Is determined (step Y135).

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y150), and the long time is stored in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. The fluctuation timer value (here, 60000 ms) is saved (step Y151), and the processing after step Y152 is performed.

  In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game in which the small hit occurrence probability is high in the normal game state, the change time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if an upper limit is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the variation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the specified time (here, 60000 ms) is measured.

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register. (Step Y136). Then, by using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is obtained (step Y137), and a subroutine call based on the special figure 2 game processing number is performed (step Y138).

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “0” in step Y138, the start of the change of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the special figure 2 variable display game, the effect setting, and the special FIG. 2 A special figure 2 ordinary processing (step Y139) for setting information necessary for performing the processing during fluctuation is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is “1” in step Y138, the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 2 display is performed. The process during two fluctuations (step Y140) is performed.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit and the type of each big hit A special figure 2 displaying process (step Y141) for setting a fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “3” in step Y138, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, and the like are performed. The processing during the fanfare / interval to be performed (step Y142) is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “4” in step Y138, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, while an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round. A special winning opening opening process (step Y143) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the last round, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening or the special figure 2 A special winning opening remaining ball process (step Y144) for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end process is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “6” in step Y138, the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108) I do.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “7” in step Y138, the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hit are performed. During the small hit fanfare (step Y146), the information necessary for the setting is set. If the special figure 2 game processing number is "8" in step Y138, a small hitting middle processing (step Y147) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is "9" in step Y138, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball won in the big winning opening during the small hitting middle processing, or the processing for ending the small hitting The small hit remaining sphere process (step Y148) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “10” in step Y138, special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

  After that, a special figure 2 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y152), and a symbol change control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. FIG. 2 ends the game processing. The special figure 2 game process performs a series of execution control for the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-described special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 game processing for the special figure 2. In the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. The corresponding processes will be described in parallel.

[Grand prize opening switch monitoring process]
FIG. 41 shows the special winning opening switch monitoring processing (steps Y102 and Y132) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the upper special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is being opened (step Y161). If the upper winning a prize port is being opened (step Y161; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. In addition, when the upper winning a prize mouth is not opening (step Y161; N), it is determined whether or not the remaining sphere of the upper winning prize is being processed (step Y162). Note that the remaining ball processing in this determination includes both the big winning port remaining ball processing based on the big hit and the small hit remaining ball processing based on the small hit.

  If the remaining ball of the upper winning a prize port is being processed (step Y162; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. In addition, when the remaining ball processing of the upper special winning opening is not being performed (step Y162; N), it is determined whether the lower special winning opening (the second special variable winning device 39) is being opened (step Y163). If the lower winning opening is not being opened (step Y163; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process ends. Further, when the lower special winning opening is being opened (step Y163; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (step Y164).

  The opening in steps Y161 and Y163 refers to the opening in the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the first special result (big hit), and the special gaming state based on the second special result (small hit). And during the opening in the second special game state. In addition, in the determination of steps Y161 to Y163, the determination may be made with reference to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 game processing number, or a flag indicating whether or not each state is set may be set. The determination may be made based on this flag.

  If there is no input to the lower winning opening switch (step Y164; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If there is an input to the lower winning opening switch (step Y164; Y), 1 is set to the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the big winning opening added in the current big winning opening switch monitoring process. (Step Y165), and the process proceeds to Step Y175.

  On the other hand, when the upper winning a prize port is open (step Y161; Y) or when the remaining sphere of the upper prize winning port is being processed (step Y162; Y), the winning counter is set to 0 in step Y166. It is set (step Y166). After that, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper winning a prize port switch 1 (one upper prize port switch 38a) (step Y167). If there is no input (step Y167; N), the process proceeds to step Y171.

  If there is an input from the upper winning opening switch 1 (step Y167; Y), a winning opening count command is prepared (step Y168), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y169). In the case of the first special variable winning device 38, a special winning opening count command is transmitted in order to perform an effect by winning. Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y170), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper winning port switch 2 (the other upper winning switch 38a) (step Y171).

  If there is no input to the upper winning a prize port switch 2 (step Y171; N), the process proceeds to step Y175. When there is an input to the upper winning opening switch 2 (step Y171; Y), a winning opening count command is prepared (step Y172), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y173). Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y174), and the flow shifts to step Y175.

  Thereafter, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step Y175; Y), when the winning prize opening remaining ball is being processed (step Y176; Y), or when the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step Y177; Y). If so, the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step Y175; N), the winning prize mouth remaining ball processing is not being performed (step Y176; N), and the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step Y177; N), the winning is achieved. The value of the counter is added to the special winning opening count (step Y178), and it is determined whether the special winning opening count is equal to or more than an upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (step Y179).

  If the special winning opening count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (here, 9) (step Y179; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the upper limit (step Y179; Y), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step Y180), and the target special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (Step Y181). Then, it is determined whether or not the opening is in the big hit, that is, in the first special game state, which is the special game state based on the big hit (step Y182).

  If it is not open at the big hit (step Y182; N), that is, if it is open at the small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the big hit is being opened (step Y182; Y), the big win opening operation end value is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (step Y183), and the big win switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

  It is also possible to transmit a special winning opening count command to the effect control device 300 when there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (step Y164; Y). In addition, when there is a remaining ball process for the lower winning port, a large winning port count command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 even when an input is made to the lower winning port switch during the remaining ball process. You may do it.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
FIG. 42 shows the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y108) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In the special map 1 usual processing, first, it is determined whether the change of the special map 1 can be started (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 can start changing in this determination means that the state is not from the stop of the change of the special figure 2 change display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, to the end of the special game state. It should be noted that, while the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game is in a state in which the change cannot be started, in this case, the special figure 1 is not in the normal processing. Here, this need not be determined.

  If the special figure 1 cannot be started to change (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 normal processing ends. In addition, when the variation of the special figure 1 can be started (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handing instruction has been notified, that is, whether the left-handing instruction notification flag has been set (step Y202). If the left-handing instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-turn instruction has not been notified (step Y202; N), a left-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y204). Thereafter, the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (step Y206). The left-turn instruction notification flag is cleared when the last special figure variation display game performed in the specific game state of the high probability state ends, and thereby the normal game state of the low probability state Is performed, the left-handed instruction is notified.

  If the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y217. If the number of reserved special figure 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y208). Thereafter, a special figure 1 change start process for setting information relating to the special figure 1 change display game is performed (step Y210), and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step Y211). Then, effect command setting processing is performed (step Y212). At the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 reservation number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 reservation is not performed. A reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared.

  Next, the special figure 1 in the special figure status area is set (information addition) (step Y212). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure change display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed, and the special figure status 4 is a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates a second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 change display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

  Next, it is determined whether the state is in the high probability state (step Y213). If the state is in the high probability state (step Y213; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If it is not in the high-probability state (step Y213; N), it is determined whether it is in the high-probability final variation (step Y214). The term “high probability final fluctuation” means that the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) from the end of the first special game state (including the stop time), and the lottery is performed in the high probability state. Is running in the last special figure change display game.

  If it is during the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y214; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If it is not during the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y214; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y215). That is, when the special figure 1 change display game is started in the low probability state, the special figure 1 change check flag is set. After that, a special figure 1 changing processing transition setting processing is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 ordinary processing ends.

[Special Figure 2 Normal Processing]
FIG. 43 shows the special figure 2 ordinary processing (step Y139) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. In the special figure 2 usual processing, first, it is determined whether the fluctuation of the special figure 2 can be started (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start to change in this determination means that the state is not from the stop of the change of the special figure 1 change display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, to the end of the special game state. It should be noted that, while the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game is not in a state where the fluctuation can be started, in this case, the special figure 2 is a state in which the normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

  If the special figure 2 cannot be started to change (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 normal processing ends. If the special figure 2 can start to change (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 2 is 0 (step Y222). The special figure 2 suspension number (second start storage number) here is based on the existence of the second start memory that can be generated to suspend the start of the special figure change display game in the high probability state, and also on the high probability state. When the upper limit value is 0 in a part or low probability state, etc., when there is a prize in the second starting winning opening 37 in a state where the variable display game can be started, the special figure 2 based on the prize is obtained. The second start memory temporarily generated to perform the start processing of the variable display game is also included.

  If the number of reserved special figure 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y224). Thereafter, a special figure 2 change start process for setting information relating to the special figure 2 change display game is performed (step Y225), and the special figure 2 is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y226). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

  Next, it is determined whether the state is in the high probability state (step Y227). If the state is in the high probability state (step Y227; Y), the process proceeds to step Y230. If it is not in the high-probability state (step Y227; N), it is determined whether it is in the high-probability final variation (step Y228). The term “high probability final fluctuation” means that the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) from the end of the first special game state (including the stop time), and the lottery is performed in the high probability state. Is running in the last special figure change display game.

  If it is during the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y228; Y), the process proceeds to step Y230. If it is not during the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y228; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y229). That is, when the special figure 2 change display game is started in the low probability state, the special figure 2 change check flag is set. Then, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting processing is performed (step Y230), and the special figure 2 ordinary processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved special figure 2 is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (step Y231). If the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y231; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232). If the special figure 1 is not fluctuating (step Y232; N), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y233). If not (step Y233; N), the customer waiting demonstration is started. Performs processing related to settings. Also, if the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y231; N), if the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232; Y), or if the customer waiting demonstration has started (step Y233; Y), Then, the process proceeds to Step Y237.

  In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step Y234), and a customer waiting demonstration command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235). A command setting process is performed (step Y236), and the process proceeds to step Y237. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it becomes possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

  Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 without the backup function loses the information of the game state, so that an appropriate effect cannot be performed. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, from the reception of this command, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state, and to transmit the probability information command based on the change of the game state. It is possible to return to the effect according to the gaming state earlier than waiting.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously, and the probability state may be changed by the processing for the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, a change start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure change display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). This allows the effect control device 300 to perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

  Further, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the game state is performed after receiving this command. Thus, it is possible to return to the effect corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the change of the game state. It should be noted that the customer waiting demonstration command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for enabling the effect to be returned to the effect according to the gaming state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 44 shows the special figure 1 change start processing (step Y209) in the above-described special figure 1 ordinary processing. This special figure 1 change start processing is processing performed at the start of the special figure 1 change display game. First, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and deviation information is obtained as result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Then, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting big hit information or small hit information is performed (step Y242).

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed. 1 information setting process (step Y244) to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game are set. (Step Y245).

  Then, a special figure 1 change pattern setting process (step Y246) for setting a change pattern that is a change mode in the special figure 1 change display game is performed, and a change start information setting for setting information of a change start of the special figure 1 change display game is performed. The processing (step Y247) is performed. Through these processes, the result and the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed are determined. Then, after that, a process for adjusting so as not to cause inconvenience between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that can be executed simultaneously is performed.

  The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived, the other is forcibly disconnected regardless of the lottery result. It ends as a result. In particular, since the special figure 2 variable display game is always a big hit or a small hit, if the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped first, such processing is performed for the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, for example, despite a high expectation effect in the special figure 1 variable display game, the game is forcibly stopped as a result of a loss, and the player has distrust. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game will be completed before the special figure 1 variable display game to be started from now on, it is possible to take measures such as preventing the effect with high expectation from being selected. Like that.

  For this purpose, first, it is determined whether the state is in the high probability state (step Y248). If the state is in the high probability state (step Y248; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In the case of the high probability state, the game progresses mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game. In this state, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and executed at a high frequency, it is known that the special figure 1 variable display game is likely to be forcibly stopped as a result of a deviation. In the special figure 1 variable display game, the effect is set in advance so that an effect with a high degree of expectation is not selected, so that no special processing is performed here.

  If it is not in the high-probability state (step Y248; N), it is determined whether it is in the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y249). The term “high probability final fluctuation” means that the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) from the end of the first special game state (including the stop time), and the lottery is performed in the high probability state. Is running in the last special figure change display game.

  If it is during the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y249; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. Since the special figure 2 variable display game which is the high probability final change is stopped in a short time, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game to be started from now on is forcibly stopped in a short time. Therefore, even if an effect with a high degree of expectation is selected for the special figure 1 variable display game, the process ends before the effect starts, and here, a process for preventing an effect with a high degree of expectation from being selected. Is not performed.

  If it is not during the high-probability final change (step Y249; N), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is changing (step Y250). If the special figure 2 is not fluctuating (step Y250; N), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, since the state is a low probability state, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started from now on, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is a very long variable time. Therefore, since it is unlikely that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped, a process for preventing an effect with high expectation from being selected is not performed here.

  If the special figure 2 is changing (step Y250; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the processing shifts to step Y254. If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, the remaining change time of the special figure 2 variable display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier, so that an effect with a high degree of expectation is not selected. No processing is performed.

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y252; N), the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is calculated (step Y253), and the special figure 1 variable display to be executed from now on It is determined whether the fluctuation time of the game is less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254). If the change time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is less than the remaining change time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier, the processing for preventing the effect with high expectation from being selected is not performed.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; N), it is notified that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer. A command is prepared (step Y255), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y256). Thereafter, a high-probability variation count update process for managing a period in which the state is set to the high-probability state is performed (step Y257), and the special figure 1 variation start process ends. The effect control device 300 performs processing such as restricting selection of an effect with a high degree of expectation for the special figure 1 variable display game based on receiving a command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer. Is supposed to do it.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N), it is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246). A process of resetting the information on the variation pattern (the first and second variation pattern numbers and the like) may be performed, and the effect control device 300 may change the variation pattern to a variation pattern that does not select an effect with high expectation. In the process of resetting the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time may not be changed or may be changed. In addition, the process of preparing a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer (step Y255) may or may not be performed.

  That is, in the special figure 1 change pattern process (step Y246) performed by the game control device 100, when the change mode information including the change time of the first change display game is determined in the normal game state, the second change display game is executed. The first variation mode determining means is capable of determining the variation mode information of the first variation display game without referring to the variation mode information. Further, the process of resetting the above-mentioned variation pattern performed by the game control device 100 is performed when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game is determined by the first variation mode determination means. Is being executed, by referring to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game, information on the variation pattern is determined without changing the determined variation time of the first variation display game. A second variation mode determination unit that can be determined again is provided.

  Also, instead of changing the variation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246), the variable pattern is executed in the future when determining the variation pattern in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246). A process (step Y254) of determining whether the change time of the special figure 1 change display game is less than the remaining change time of the special figure 2 change display game is performed, and a change pattern according to the game situation is determined from the beginning. You may do it.

  In addition, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game can be selected as the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed only when the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. A process (step Y254) of determining whether or not the time is less than the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game is performed. If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, this processing is unnecessary because the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped by the result of the out of order.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 2 change start processing (step Y225) in the above-described special figure 2 usual processing. The special figure 2 change start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 change display game. First, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and the outlier information is obtained as the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Then, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting big hit information or small hit information is performed (step Y262).

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed. A 2 information setting process (step Y264) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which various kinds of information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are set. (Step Y265).

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting for setting information of a fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. The processing (step Y267) is performed. By these processes, the result and the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed are determined. Thereafter, a high-probability variation count update process for managing a period in which the state is set to the high-probability state is performed (step Y268), and the special figure 2 variation start process ends.

  In the special figure 2 change start processing, processing for adjusting the special figure 1 change display game and the special figure 2 change display game, which can be executed at the same time, so as not to cause inconvenience, is not performed. This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is low, and there is little chance that the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended with a loss result. However, similarly to the special figure 1 change display game, when the game is forcibly stopped as a result of a loss, selection of an effect with high expectation may be restricted.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 46 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) in the above-described special figure 1 change start process. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, a jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (step Y273), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to zero. Note that the reserved number 1 area is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the special figure 1 is the earliest).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 as a result of the big hit determination of the running special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y275). If the big hit is a big hit (step Y275; Y), the process proceeds to step Y279. I do. In other words, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not made a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not the obtained big hit random value matches the big hit determination value.

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y276) is a jackpot (step Y277; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the outlier information was saved in step Y272 (step Y278). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y276) is not a jackpot (step Y277; N), whether the acquired jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value indicates whether or not the jackpot is a small jackpot. Is performed (step Y279).

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten on the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step Y271, and saved. Then (step Y281), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not a small hit (step Y280; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 47 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the above-described special figure 2 change start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) of the RWM and prepared (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to zero. The reserved number 1 area is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage with the earliest digestion order (here, the first of special figure 2). When the upper limit value is 0, the second start memory temporarily generated to perform the start processing of the special figure 2 variable display game is always stored in the area for one hold number.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 as a result of the big hit determination of the running special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (step Y295), and if it is a big hit (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. I do. In other words, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not made a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the obtained big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

  If the result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is a big hit (step Y297; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the missed information was saved in step Y292 (step Y298). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is not a jackpot (step Y297; N), whether the acquired jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value indicates whether or not the jackpot is a small jackpot. Is performed (step Y299).

  If the result of the small hit determination processing (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step Y291, and the save is performed. Then (step Y301), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination process]
FIG. 48 shows the big hit determination processing (steps Y276 and Y296) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing described above. In the big hit determination processing, first, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit determination value that is the lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value that is the upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. , Is determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, an outlier is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the player has lost the lottery of the big hit. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether the state is the high probability state (step Y313).

  If it is in the high-probability state (step Y313; Y), an upper-limit determination value during high-probability is set (step Y314), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper-limit determination value (step Y316). ). If the state is not the high-probability state (step Y313; N), an upper-limit determination value during low-probability is set (step Y315), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper-limit determination value (step Y316). .

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, if the big hit is not a big hit, an outlier is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing ends. When the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; N), that is, when it is a big hit, a big hit is set as a judgment result (step Y318), and the big hit judgment processing ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
FIG. 49 shows the small hit determination processing (steps Y279 and Y299) in the above described big hit flag 1 setting processing and big hit flag 2 setting processing. In the small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is smaller than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). It is to be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or larger than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and equal to or smaller than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, a small hit is determined. Also, the large hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, an outlier is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a result of the determination indicates that the lottery has been lost. If the value of the big hit random number is not smaller than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set, that is, whether the determination is for the special figure 1 variable display game. (Step Y322).

  If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), the small hit upper limit judgment value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), and the value of the target big hit random number is set to the small hit upper limit judgment value. It is determined whether it is greater than (Step Y325). If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y322; N), that is, if the determination is for the special figure 2 variable display game, the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324). It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325).

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y326), and the small hit judgment processing ends. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step Y327), and the small hit judgment processing ends. I do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 50 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (step Y243) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (the number of reservations 1) ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (step Y332). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y334). The big hit type is selected by this process. The reason why the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area is when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because the result may be forcibly changed to the result.

  After that, a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), and a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (step Y337), and the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained. The special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area is saved (step Y338). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, an ornament special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and if it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step Y340). Next, a special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this processing. Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and a decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of a loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y344), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stopped at the special figure 1 stop. The pattern is saved in the symbol pattern area (step Y345), and a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure 1 command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y347), and effect command setting processing (step Y348) is performed. This decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350). The one symbol per hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 51 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (step Y263) in the above-described special figure 2 change start processing. The special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is the same as the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process for the special symbol 2. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (the number of reservations 1) ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (step Y362). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step Y363), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol save area (step Y364). The big hit type is selected by this process. The reason why the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area is when a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because the result may be forcibly changed to the result.

  After that, the special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (step Y367), and the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained. The special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area is saved (step Y368). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, an ornament special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369), and if it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step Y370). Next, a special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol save area (step Y372). The small hit type is selected by this processing. Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373), and a decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y374), and the non-stop symbol pattern is stopped. The pattern is saved in the symbol pattern area (step Y375), and a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure 2 command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y377), and effect command setting processing (step Y378) is performed. This decorative special figure 2 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y380). The 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 1 information setting processing]
FIG. 52 shows the special figure 1 information setting processing (step Y244) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing. In the special figure 1 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a high probability is being established (step Y401). If the probability is not high (step Y401; N), a fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y402), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern are obtained (step Y403). It is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a big hit stop symbol pattern (step Y404).

  If it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y404; Y), the process proceeds to step Y412. If it is not the special figure 1 big hit (step Y404; N), it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a small hit stop symbol pattern (step Y405). If it is not the special figure 1 small hit (step Y405; N), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step Y407. If the special figure is one small hit (step Y405; Y), the special figure 1 reservation number is added to the latter half offset data to update the value (step Y406), and the special figure 1 reservation number is added to the first half offset data. The value is converted by the addition (step Y407), and the process proceeds to step Y412.

  On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y401; Y), it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y408). If the special figure 1 is not the big hit (step Y408; N), the first half offset data for the special figure 1 at high probability is set (step Y409), and the second half offset data for the special figure 1 length variation is set. It is set (step Y411). If it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y408; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 1 big hit at the time of high probability is set (step Y410), and the second half offset data for the special figure 1 length variation is set. (Step Y411).

  Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y412), and the second half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y413). The setting process ends.

  That is, in the special figure 1 change display game in the normal gaming state, in the case of a small hit, the change pattern in consideration of the number of special figure 1 reservations is determined for both the first half change pattern and the second half change pattern. In the first half, the variation pattern is determined in consideration of the number of special figure 1 reservations, and in the case of a big hit, the variation pattern is determined without considering the number of special figure 1 reservations. Further, in the special figure 1 change display game in the specific game state, the change pattern is determined without considering the number of special figure 1 reservations.

[Special figure 2 information setting processing]
FIG. 53 shows the special figure 2 information setting processing (step Y264) in the above-described special figure 2 change start processing. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a high probability is being established (step Y421). If the probability is high (step Y421; Y), a variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y422), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y423). ), And proceeds to step Y428. If the probability is high, a variation pattern may be set in consideration of the special figure 2 suspension count.

  On the other hand, when it is not during the high probability (step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y424). If the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y424; N), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 at low probability is set (step Y425), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. It is set (step Y427). If it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y424; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y426), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. (Step Y427).

  Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y428), and the second half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y429). The setting process ends.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing]
FIG. 54 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing (step Y246) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. The change pattern is a first half change pattern that is a change mode from the start of the special figure change display game to the reach state, and a second half change pattern that is a change mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure change display game. The first half fluctuation pattern is set after the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

  In this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, a fluctuation group selection address table is set (step Y451), and an address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is obtained and prepared (step Y452). Then, the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 to prepare it (step Y453).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is off, that is, whether or not the stop symbol pattern is a non-stop symbol pattern (step Y454). If the special figure 1 is off (step Y454; Y), 2-byte distribution processing is performed. (Step Y455), and proceeds to step Y457. If the special figure 1 is not out of position (step Y454; N), a sorting process is performed (step Y456), and the flow shifts to step Y457. When the result is a big hit or a small hit, the sorting value is 1 byte, but when the result is out of order, the sorting value is 2 bytes to enable various effects.

  Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of Toku-zu 1 (Step Y458). Then, a distribution process (step Y459) is performed, a second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained, and saved in the second half variation number area (step Y460). By this processing, a second half variation pattern is set.

  Next, a first half variation group table is set (step Y461), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the second variation number determined as the variation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) of FIG. Prepare (step Y464).

  After that, a distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained and saved in the first variation number area (step Y467), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process ends. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started from now is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing]
FIG. 55 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing (step Y266) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. In this special figure 2 variation pattern setting process, first, a second half variation selection address table is set (step Y471), and an address of the second half variation selection table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is obtained and prepared (step Y472). Then, the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) of the special map 2 to prepare it (step Y473).

  Next, a distribution process is performed (step Y474), a second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained, and saved in the second half variation number area (step Y475). By this processing, a second half variation pattern is set.

  Then, a first half variation group table is set (step Y476), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the determined second variation number (step Y477). Next, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y478), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of FIG. (Step Y479).

  Thereafter, a distribution process (step Y480) is performed, the first variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained and saved in the first variation number area (step Y481), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is ended. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started from now is set. In the special figure 2 change display game, since there are few types of change in the latter half, the latter half change group is not selected by the change pattern random number 1 and the change pattern is determined using only the change pattern random numbers 2 and 3.

[2-byte distribution processing]
FIG. 56 shows a 2-byte distribution process (step Y455) in the above-described special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. The two-byte distribution process is a process for selecting a second-half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second-half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In the two-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the head data of the prepared second half fluctuation group table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (step Y501). Here, the second half variation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half variation pattern group, but defines the second half variation pattern group in which the second half variation pattern is “no reach”. In the fluctuation group table, since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top.

  If the first data in the second half fluctuation group table is a code without distribution (step Y502; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution processing ends. I do. On the other hand, if the data at the head of the second half fluctuation group table is not a code without distribution (step Y502; N), one distribution value specified first in the second half fluctuation group table is obtained (step Y503).

  Next, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y373 from the loaded random value (the value of the variation pattern random number 1) (step Y504), and the calculated new random value is calculated. Is smaller than “0” (step Y505). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (step Y505; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y506), the processing shifts to step Y503, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do. That is, in step Y503, the distribution value specified next in the fluctuation group selection table is acquired, and then in step Y505, the determined random number is subtracted as a new random value, and the distribution value is subtracted. A numerical value is calculated (step Y504). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y505).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step Y505 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y505; Y). As a result, any one of the second-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one second-half variation selection table defined in the second-half variation group table. If it is determined in step Y505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the allocation result (step Y507), and the 2-byte allocation processing is performed. To end.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 57 shows the distribution processing (steps Y456, Y459, Y465, Y474, Y480) in the above-described special figure 1 variation pattern setting processing and special figure 2 variation pattern setting processing. The distribution process selects the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 or the first half variation selection table ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether the leading data of the prepared second-half variation selection table (selection table) or the first-half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”). (Step Y511). Here, the second-half change selection table and the first-half change selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second-half fluctuation pattern and the first-half fluctuation pattern, similarly to the second-half fluctuation group table. In the case of a selection table having no assignment, the assignment value “0”, that is, a code without assignment is specified at the top.

  If the first data in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step Y512; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y517), and the distribution is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, if the data at the head of the second-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (step Y512; N), one distribution value specified first in the second-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table Is obtained (step Y513).

  Next, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y513 from the loaded random number value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 or the fluctuation pattern random number 3) (step Y514). It is determined whether the obtained new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y515). If the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step Y515; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y516), the processing shifts to step Y513 and the subsequent steps are performed. Perform processing.

  That is, in step Y513, after obtaining the distribution value specified next in the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table, the distribution value is subtracted as the determined random number value as a new random value in step Y515. Then, a new random value is calculated (step Y514). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y515).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step Y515 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y515; Y). As a result, any one of the second-half variation number and the first-half variation number is selected from at least one second-half variation pattern and the first-half variation pattern defined in the second-half variation selection table and the first-half variation selection table. If it is determined in step Y515 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y515; Y), the address is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y517), and the distribution process ends. I do.

[Change start information setting process]
FIG. 58 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y247 and Y267) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y551), and if the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y551; Y), The random number storage areas (for the number of reserved 1) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step Y552). If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y551; N), that is, if the information of the special figure 2 is being set, the random number storage area of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of the special figure 2 (for the reserved number 1) ) Is cleared (step Y553).

  Next, a first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y554), and a first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y555). Further, a second half variation time value table is set (step Y556), and a second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is obtained (step Y557). Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step Y558), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y559).

  Note that if the result of the special figure 2 change display game in the normal game state, which is the low probability state, is a loss or a small hit, a long change with a very long change time is set. In this case, as the above-mentioned added value, the remaining time (time less than 60,000 ms) excluding the time that can be counted using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times of counting the specified time (here, 60000 ms), is calculated as the added value. It is supposed to be.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y560). If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y560; Y), the process proceeds to step Y564. If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y560; N), that is, if the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started (step Y561). The long variation is a variation pattern that is set when the result is out of place or a small hit in the normal game state in the special figure 2 variation display game, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

  If the long change of the special figure 2 is not started (step Y561; N), 0 is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y562), and the process proceeds to step Y564. If it is the start of the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 (step Y561; Y), 9 is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y563), and the process proceeds to step Y564.

  Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y564), and a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step Y565), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y566). ). Next, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y567). If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y567; Y), the number of reserved special figure 1 is updated by -1 (step Y567). (Step Y568), the contents of the random number storage area of the special figure 1 are shifted (Step Y569), the empty area after the shift is cleared (Step Y572), and the change start information setting processing is ended. If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y567; N), the reserved number of the special figure 2 is updated by -1 (step Y570), and the contents of the random number storage area of the special figure 2 are shifted (step Y571). Then, the free area after the shift is cleared (step Y572), and the change start information setting process ends.

  Through the above processing, information relating to the start of the special figure change display game is set. That is, based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage means, the game control device 100 displays the result of the first variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game) and the variation mode information in the first variable display game. Is a first determining means that can be determined before the start of. Further, based on the second start memory stored in the second start storage means, the game control device 100 displays the result and the change mode information of the second change display game (the special figure 2 change display game) in the second change display game. A second determining means that can be determined before the start of. When the upper limit value of the second start memory is 0, such as in the low probability state, the second start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not generated, so that the game control device 100 sets the second start prize. A predetermined random number is extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 37, and the result of the second variable display game (the special figure 2 variable display game) and the variation mode information are extracted based on the predetermined random number. It can be said that the second determining means can be determined before the start. In addition, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determination unit that can determine a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  From the above, the first start winning opening 36 is disposed at a position where a game ball fired on one side of the game area 32 can win, and the second start winning opening 37 is fired on the other side of the game area 32. The changed game ball is disposed at a position where a winning can be achieved, and the change mode information of the change display game includes information on the change time capable of specifying the execution time of the change display game, and in the normal state (normal game state). The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the second determination means is greater than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means. It will be long.

  Then, the information about the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined change pattern based on the reception of the information about the start of the special figure change display game. To set the detailed contents of the effect in the decoration special figure change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of storages to be started (the number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. A fluctuation command including information on a pattern is exemplified. By transmitting the decoration special figure command before the change command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

  That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a first variable display game execution control unit capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determining unit. . Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control relating to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game process. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a second variable display game execution control unit capable of controlling the execution of the second variable display game (the special figure 2 variable display game) based on the determination result of the second determining unit. . In addition, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game process.

  Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and the variation mode information of the first variable display game determined by the first determination unit and the result and the variation mode information of the second variable display game determined by the second determination unit as control information. The transmission means is capable of transmitting to the effect control means (effect control device 300). In addition, the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game in response to the start of the variation display game, and when the measurement time elapses the variation time. It forms a measuring means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

  Note that if the result of the special figure 2 change display game in the normal game state, which is a low probability state, is a loss or a small hit, a long change with a very long change time is set. A command indicating only a long variation may be transmitted without transmitting information on time to the effect control device 300. In the case of a long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply perform the fluctuation display, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the fluctuation display based on receiving the command indicating the long fluctuation. The fluctuation time is managed only by the game control device 100, and a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the fluctuation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the fluctuation display based on receiving the stop command. To do. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the effect control device 300.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update processing]
FIG. 59 shows the high probability change frequency update processing (steps Y257 and Y268) in the special figure 1 change start processing and the special figure 2 change start processing described above. In this high-probability-variation-number updating process, it is first determined whether or not the high-probability is being changed (step Y581). If not (step Y581; N), the high-probability-change number updating process is ended. If the high probability is in progress (step Y581; Y), the high probability change count for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game in the high probability state is updated by -1 (step Y582), and the high probability change count is changed. Is smaller than 4 (step Y583).

  If the number of times of high probability change is not smaller than 4 (Step Y583; N), the process of updating times of high probability change is ended. If the number of high-probability fluctuations is smaller than 4 (step Y583; Y), the upper limit of the special figure 2 start memory is set to the same value as the number of high-probability fluctuations (step Y584), and the value is out of the hold upper limit value range. The big hit random number is discarded (step Y585), and it is determined whether the number of times of high probability fluctuation is 0 (step Y586).

  As shown in FIG. 100 described later, the upper limit value of the second start memory is set to 4 with the start of the specific game state (high probability state), and is sequentially reduced in a predetermined period before the end of the specific game state, and the specific game state is reduced. It is set to 0 at the end of the state. Here, the setting is made to decrease the upper limit value of the second start storage in a predetermined period before the end of the specific gaming state.

  In the case of decreasing the upper limit, only the second start memories that have already been stored are made valid from the oldest one in the order of storage up to the upper limit. Those that fall outside the upper limit are discarded. In this discarding process, the corresponding random number storage area may be cleared to 0, but as the upper limit value decreases, a new upper limit value is set as the value of the current hold number. Even if the random number is stored in the random number storage area outside the upper limit value range, the random number is not referred to, and is overwritten later when the second start memory is generated. Need not be cleared to zero.

  If the number of high-probability changes is not 0 (step Y586; N), that is, if the high-probability state continues, the process of updating the number of high-probability changes ends. If the number of high-probability changes is 0 (step Y586; Y), that is, if the high-probability state is to be ended, a signal relating to the high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y587). Here, it is set so that the two big hit signals are turned off. Further, a signal regarding the high probability state and the end of the time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y588). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 change time reduction state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 change time reduction state signal is set to OFF.

  Further, a low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y589), and a special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y590). Then, the high-probability final fluctuation flag corresponding to the symbol for which the fluctuation starts is set (step Y591), and the high-probability fluctuation frequency update process ends.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the high probability state is set until the predetermined number of special figure change display games are executed after the end of the special game state, but the special figure 1 change display game and the special figure 2 change display are set. Since the game can be executed at the same time, the high-probability-variation-number updating process for managing the number of high-probability states is performed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game. If the gaming machine does not execute the special-figure variable display game while the other special-figure variable display game is running as in the past, the probability state is set by the end of the predetermined number of special-figure variable display games. There is no problem if you change to the low probability state. However, if the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability state is changed to a low probability at the end of the predetermined number of special figure variable display games. If the state is changed, the judgment is made in a high probability state even to the other special figure change display game started during execution of the one special figure change display game, and the high probability change is performed for a predetermined number of times or more. The game can be executed in the state. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, one of the special figure variable display games at the predetermined number of times is executed in a high probability state. After the judgment, it is necessary to keep the low probability state before the start of the other special figure change display game. In this case, immediately after the processing at the start of the one special figure change display game, which is the predetermined number of times, is completed. It is possible to change to a low probability state.

  As described above, the high probability variation count updating process is performed at the start of the special figure variation display game, and therefore, for the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery in the high probability state is performed, the variation of the special figure variation display game is performed. During the display, it is already in the low probability state. Therefore, if other processing is performed with reference to the actual probability state during the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game, the processing may be performed as a low probability state, which may cause inconvenience. is there. Therefore, the special-figure variation display game is set with a high-probability final variation flag so that the special-figure variation display game can be treated as a game being executed in a high-probability state. The high-probability final fluctuation flag is information that can determine whether the last special-figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery in the high-probability state is performed is the special-figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special-figure 2 fluctuation display game. Contains.

[Special figure 1 change processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 60 shows the special figure 1 change processing transition setting processing (step Y216) in the special figure 1 ordinary processing. In this special figure 1 change processing transition setting processing, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y601), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y602).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y603), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is stored in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (step Y605). For example, 100 ms is set (step Y606). Furthermore, an initial value is set in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 changing processing transition setting processing ends.

  The initial value to be set in the symbol number area during the fluctuating special figure 1 is 0, whereby the fluctuating display starts from a state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is turned on in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special figure 2 processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 61 shows the special figure 2 change processing transition setting processing (step Y230) in the special figure 2 ordinary processing. In the special figure 2 change processing transition setting processing, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y611), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y612).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y613), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the initial value of the blink control timer (timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is stored in the special figure 2 blink control timer area (step Y615). For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y616). Furthermore, an initial value is set in the special figure 2 changing symbol number area (step Y617), and the special figure 2 changing processing transition setting processing ends.

  The initial value set in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 2 is 0, whereby the variable display is started from a state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is turned on in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

  It should be noted that when the variable display is started on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it is started from a state where all the segments are turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any of the result modes, or if there is a segment that is not used in any of the result modes, the variable display is started at least from a state in which the segment is turned on. You may do it. Alternatively, the variable display may be started from a state where the same segment is turned on every time. In addition, the lighting mode when the change is started in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be the same or different.

[Processing during special figure 1 fluctuation]
FIG. 62 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the above-described special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times of design confirmation output is updated by +1 (step Y621), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y622), and the effect command setting processing is performed. Performed (step Y623).

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y625). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the stop may be forcibly stopped before the change time set at the start of the change, so that when stopping the change, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the final variation has a high probability (step Y626). If the special figure 1 change display game is a high probability final change, the high probability final change flag of the special figure 1 is set. If the final variation is not a high-probability final variation (step Y626; N), a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y627), and the process proceeds to step Y629. If it is a high-probability final change (step Y626; Y), a display time at the time of the high-probability final change is set (step Y628), and the process proceeds to step Y629. The display time (stop time) of the special figure 1 change display game set here is 600 ms for a loss, 2000 ms for a big hit, and 136 ms for a small hit if the final change is not high probability. Display time is set. In the case of the high probability final fluctuation, a display time of 7000 ms is set regardless of the result.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of place, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of place (step Y629). If the special figure 1 is out of alignment (step Y629; Y), the flow shifts to step Y644. If the special figure 1 is not out of the way (step Y629; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y630). Whether or not the special figure 2 change display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  If the special figure 2 change display game is not being executed (step Y630; Y), the process proceeds to step Y640. If the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y630; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 displaying process is in progress (step Y631). In other words, in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the result of the loss, based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game has a special result. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already completed the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not been completed, the forced stop is also performed.

  When the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y631; Y), the flow shifts to step Y633. When the special figure 2 is not being displayed (step Y631; N), the number of times of outputting the symbol determination number is updated by +1 (step Y632), and the display time of the special figure 1 set above as the display time of the special figure 2 is set. A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y633). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of the special figure 2 as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are finished simultaneously. The display time is reset even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already being displayed, and a new display time is started.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y634), commands are loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area to prepare them (step Y635), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y636). ). After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y638), and processing transition setting processing 2 during special figure 2 display is performed (step Y639).

  Then, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y640), and the special figure 1 small hit is determined, that is, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is the small hit. Is determined (step Y641). If it is a special figure 1 small hit (step Y641; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. If the special figure is not a small hit (step Y641; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y642). ), The information is loaded from the special winning opening opening information area and saved in the winning opening opening information area (step Y643).

  Thereafter, information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y644), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting processing 1 is performed (step Y645). The displaying process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation processing]
FIG. 63 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the above described special figure 2 game process. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and prepared (step Y652), and the effect command setting processing is performed. Perform (Step Y653).

  Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y655). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the final variation has a high probability (step Y656). If the special figure 2 change display game is a high probability final change, the high probability final change flag of the special figure 2 is set.

  If the final variation is not a high-probability final variation (step Y656; N), a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y657), and the flow shifts to step Y659. If it is a high-probability final change (step Y656; Y), the display time at the high-probability final change is set (step Y658), and the flow shifts to step Y659. The display time (stop time) of the special figure 2 variable display game set here is 600 ms regardless of the result when the final probability is not the high probability final variation, and regardless of the result when the final probability is the high probability final variation. A display time of 7000 ms is set.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of place, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of place (step Y659). If the special figure 2 is out of alignment (step Y659; Y), the flow shifts to step Y674. If the special figure 2 is not out of the way (step Y659; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y660). Whether or not the special figure 1 change display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  If the special figure 1 change display game is not being executed (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y670. If the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y660; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 displaying process is in progress (step Y661). That is, in this case, based on the special result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the result. Note that the forced stop is also performed when the special figure 1 variable display game has already completed the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended.

  When the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y661; Y), the process proceeds to step Y664. When the special figure 1 is not being displayed (N in step Y661), the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y662), and the process proceeds to step Y664.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y664), a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area to prepare it (step Y665), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y666). ). Thereafter, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y668), and special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 is performed (step Y669).

  Then, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y670), and the special figure 2 small hit is determined, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is the small hit. Is determined (step Y671). If it is the special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; Y), the flow shifts to step Y674. If the special hit is not the small hit of special figure 2 (step Y671; N), that is, if it is a big hit, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 upper limit number information area and saved in the round upper limit information area (step Y672). ), The information is loaded from the special winning opening opening information area and saved in the winning opening opening information area (step Y673).

  Thereafter, information is loaded from the special symbol 2 stop symbol evacuation area, saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area (step Y674), and the process shift setting process 1 during special figure 2 display is performed (step Y675). The displaying process ends.

[Special figure 1 display in progress transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 64 shows the special figure 1 displaying processing shift setting processing 1 (step Y645) in the above-described special figure 1 changing processing. In the special figure 1 display processing shift setting processing 1, first, a special figure 1 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 1 display processing is set (step Y681), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Is saved (step Y682).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as a control information of the special figure 1 change display game on the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the change stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step Y684). ), The special figure 1 changing process shift setting process 1 ends.

[Special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 65 shows the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1 (step Y675) in the above-described special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 2 display processing shift setting processing 1, first, a special figure 2 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 2 display processing is set (step Y691), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Is saved (step Y692).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the change in the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as a control information of the special figure 2 change display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag relating to the change stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (step Y694). ), The special figure 2 changing process transition setting process 1 ends.

[Transition setting processing 2 during special figure 1 display]
FIG. 66 shows the special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step Y669) in the above-described special figure 2 changing processing. In the special figure 1 display processing shift setting processing 2, first, a special figure 1 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 1 display processing is set (step Y701), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Is saved (step Y702).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the change of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 change display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 is displayed. The stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y704).

  The processing up to this point is the same as the above-described special figure 1 display-in-process shift setting processing 1, and thereafter, information for setting a result of a loss is set. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y706).

  Next, the special figure 1 big winning opening opening information area is cleared (step Y707), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y708), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y709). ). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step Y710), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y711), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting processing 2 is ended. .

[Special figure 2 display in progress display setting processing 2]
FIG. 67 shows the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2 (step Y639) in the above-described special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 2 display processing shift setting processing 2, first, a special figure 2 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 2 display processing is set (step Y721), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Is saved (step Y722).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the change of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 2 change display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 is displayed. The stop flag related to the change stop on the display 52 is saved in the change control flag area of the special figure 2 (step Y724).

  Up to this point, the process is the same as the above-described special figure 2 during-display process shift setting process 1, and thereafter, information for setting a result as a loss is set. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y726).

  Next, the special figure 2 big win opening information area is cleared (step Y727), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y728), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y729). ). Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step Y730), the special figure 2 stop symbol area is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y731), and the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting processing 2 is ended. .

  By the processing of FIGS. 62 to 67 described above, when one special figure variable display game has a special result, the other special figure variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disconnection result. That is, based on the special result of the special figure 1 variable display game, a first end control process is performed in which the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the result of the special figure 2 and the special figure 2 variable display game is changed to the special result. As a result, a second end control process in which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the loss is performed.

  From the above, the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variable display game when performing the execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). When the second variable display game (the special figure 2 variable display game) for which execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has a special result, the first variable display game for which the execution control is performed Can be ended as a result other than the special result, and the second variable display game execution control means executes the first variable display game execution control means when controlling the execution of the second variable display game. When the first variable display game being controlled has a special result, the second variable display game performing the execution control can be ended as a result other than the special result. The Rukoto. With this, when a special result is derived in one of the variable display games, the other variable display game can be forcibly stopped with a disconnection result, so that no trouble occurs even when simultaneous fluctuation is performed. Can be

[Processing while displaying special figure 1]
68 and 69 show the special figure 1 displaying process (step Y110) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In this special figure 1 display processing, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing is loaded (step Y751), and the small hit flag is set. One area is cleared (step Y752).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing is loaded (step Y753), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y754). Then, the special figure 1 judges whether the big hit is the big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is the big hit information (step Y755). If the big hit is not the big hit (step Y755; N), the process shifts to the step Y777. If it is a big hit (step Y755; Y), a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (the special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variable display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, The middle signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

  Then, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is prepared (step Y757), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y758). That is, the abnormal change notification is ended with the occurrence of the first special game state. Thereafter, a round number upper limit table is set (step Y759), and a round number upper limit value (16, 8, 4, or 2 in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained, and the round number upper limit value is obtained. It is saved in the area (step Y760). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

  Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the design command area to prepare (step Y762), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y763). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y765).

  Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure change display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of the present embodiment, in step Y766, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability change D1, is turned on when the 2R probability change D1 is in the high probability state, and is 2R probability change in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned off. The three jackpot signals are turned ON when the type of jackpot is a jackpot other than the 2R probability change D1, turned OFF when the 2R probability change D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability change in the low probability state. It is turned ON when it is D1.

  Then, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms or 4 ms) corresponding to the big win opening information is set (step Y767), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). . Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the upper winning prize port (first special variable prize winning device 38) (step Y769).

  If it is a big hit to open the upper winning prize opening (step Y769; Y), the upper winning prize opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y770), and the out-of-monitoring period flag is set in the upper winning prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step Y771), and the flow shifts to step Y774. On the other hand, if the big hit is not a big hit to open the big win (step Y769; N), that is, if it is a big hit to open the bottom big win (the second special variable winning device 39), the area of the bottom big win is illegally won. Is cleared (step Y772), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the lower winning award opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y773), and the flow shifts to step Y774.

  Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y774) and saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y775). Further, a fanfare / interval mid-process shift setting process (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 displaying process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in step Y755, if the special map 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N), that is, if the big hit flag 1 is the outlier information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y777). When the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), it is determined whether the game is the high probability final change, that is, the last special figure change display game in which the lottery in the high probability state is performed. A determination is made (step Y778).

  If it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y778; N), the flow shifts to step Y783. If it is a high-probability final variation (step Y778; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y779), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y780). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y781), and the left-turn instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y782). By clearing the left-turn instruction notification flag, a left-turn instruction notification command is set in the next special figure 1 usual processing, and a notification to instruct left-turn is performed.

  Thereafter, commands are loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare them (step Y783), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y784). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y786), and it is determined whether or not a high probability is in progress (step Y787).

  If the probability is not high (step Y787; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y788). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y789). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handing is displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is during the high probability (step Y787; Y), the signal related to the right strike instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, it is set so that the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing right-hand operation is provided.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit to open the upper winning prize port (the first special variable winning device 38) (step Y792), and if it is a small hit to open the upper winning prize port (step Y792; Y), The upper winning prize mouth illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y793), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the upper winning prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y794), and the process proceeds to step Y797. On the other hand, if the winning is not a small hit opening the upper winning prize (Step Y792; N), that is, if the winning is a small hit opening the lower winning prize (second special variable winning device 39), the lower winning prize is illegally won. The several areas are cleared (step Y795), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the lower winning award opening irregularity monitoring period flag area (step Y796), and the process proceeds to step Y797. Then, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing (step Y797) is performed, and the special figure 1 displaying middle processing ends.

  If it is determined in step Y777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), it is a high-probability final change, that is, the last special figure in which the lottery is performed in the high-probability state. It is determined whether or not the game is a variable display game (step Y798).

  If it is not the high-probability final variation (step Y798; N), the process proceeds to step Y806. If it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y798; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y799), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y800). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y801), and the left-turn instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y802).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special figure 2, that is, the second special game state based on the small hit generated in the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y803). If the small hit in the special map 2 is being performed (step Y803; Y), the process proceeds to step Y806. Thus, the state of instructing right-handing is maintained. If the small hit in the special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y803; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y804), and the left-handed state is displayed in the gaming state display number 2 area. The number is saved (step Y805). After that, the special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y806), the special figure 1 normal processing transition setting processing 1 is performed (step Y807), and the special figure 1 displaying processing ends. .

[Special figure 2 display processing]
70 and 71 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y141) in the above-described special figure 2 game process. In the special figure 2 displaying process, the same process as the above-described special figure 1 displaying process is performed on the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 display processing, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 change start processing is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is set. Two areas are cleared (step Y812).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 change start processing is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, the special figure 2 judges whether the big hit is the big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is the big hit information (step Y815). If the big hit is not the big hit (step Y815; N), the process proceeds to step Y837. In the case of a big hit (step Y815; Y), a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game (for example, the condition device in-operation signal is turned ON, the accessory continuous operation device is activated) The middle signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

  Then, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is prepared (step Y817), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y818). That is, the abnormal change notification is ended with the occurrence of the first special game state. Thereafter, a round number upper limit value table is set (step Y819), and a round number upper limit value (16, 8, 4, or 2 in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the round number upper limit value is obtained. Save to the area (step Y820). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

  Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the design command area to prepare (step Y822), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y823). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y825).

  Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure change display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of the present embodiment, in step Y826, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability change D1, is turned on when the 2R probability change D1 is in the high probability state, and is 2R probability change in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned off. The three jackpot signals are turned ON when the type of jackpot is a jackpot other than the 2R probability change D1, turned OFF when the 2R probability change D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability change in the low probability state. It is turned ON when it is D1.

  Then, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms, or 4 ms) corresponding to the big win opening information is set (step Y827), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). . Then, it is determined whether it is a big hit to open the upper winning prize port (first special variable prize winning device 38) (step Y829).

  If it is a big hit to open the upper winning prize mouth (step Y829; Y), the upper winning prize mouth illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y830), and the extraordinary monitoring period flag is set in the upper winning prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step Y831), and the flow shifts to step Y834. On the other hand, if the winning is not a jackpot opening the upper winning opening (step Y829; N), that is, if it is a jackpot opening the lower winning opening (the second special variable winning device 39), the lower winning opening illegal winning number area is set. Is cleared (step Y832), the flag outside the irregularity monitoring period is saved in the lower winning award opening irregularity monitoring period flag area (step Y833), and the flow shifts to step Y834.

  Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y834) and saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y835). Further, a fanfare / interval mid-process shift setting process (step Y836) is performed, and the special figure 2 displaying process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in step Y815, if the special map 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is the outlier information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information). Yes (step Y837). If the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), it is determined whether the game is the high probability final change, that is, the last special figure change display game in which the lottery in the high probability state is performed. A determination is made (step Y838).

  If it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y838; N), the flow shifts to step Y843. If it is the high probability final variation (step Y838; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y839), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y840). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y841), and the left-turn instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y842). By clearing the left-turn instruction notification flag, a left-turn instruction notification command is set in the next special figure 1 usual processing, and a notification to instruct left-turn is performed.

  Thereafter, commands are loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare them (step Y843), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y844). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y846), and it is determined whether or not a high probability is in progress (step Y847).

  If the probability is not high (step Y847; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handing is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the case of high probability (step Y847; Y), a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, it is set so that the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing right-hand operation is provided.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit that opens the big win (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y852). If it is a small hit that opens the big win (step Y852; Y), The upper winning prize opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y853), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the upper winning prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and the process proceeds to step Y857. On the other hand, if the winning is not a small hit opening the upper winning prize opening (step Y852; N), that is, if it is a small hit opening the lower winning prize opening (the second special variable winning device 39), the lower winning prize opening is illegally won. The several areas are cleared (step Y855), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the lower winning award opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y856), and the process proceeds to step Y857. Then, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing (step Y857) is performed, and the special figure 2 displaying middle processing ends.

  If it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), it is a high probability final change, that is, the last special figure in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state. It is determined whether or not the game is a variable display game (step Y858). If it is not the high-probability final variation (step Y858; N), the process proceeds to step Y866. If it is the high probability final variation (step Y858; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y859), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y860). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y861), and the left-turn instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y862).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special figure 1 is in progress, that is, the second special game state is based on the small hit generated in the special figure 1 variable display game (step Y863). If the small hit in the special map 1 is in progress (step Y863; Y), the flow shifts to step Y866. Thus, the state of instructing right-handing is maintained. When the small hit is not occurring in the special map 1 (step Y863; N), the signal relating to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y864), and the left-handed state is displayed in the gaming state display number 2 area. The number is saved (step Y865). After that, the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) during the change of the special figure 2 (step Y866), the special figure 2 normal processing shift setting processing 1 is performed (step Y867), and the special figure 2 displaying processing ends. .

  That is, based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result, the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened along with the operation of the condition device. A second special game generating means for generating a second special game state for opening the special variable prize device without operating the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has the second special result as well as forming the variable display game; Make

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 72 illustrates details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y776 and Y836) in the above-described special figure 1 displaying processing and special figure 2 displaying processing. In this fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, first, a signal relating to the start of a big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, one big hit signal output at a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (special symbol fluctuation time reduction state) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 change time reduction state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 change time reduction state signal is set to OFF.

  After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the number with a low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special figure game mode is executed. The special figure low probability flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

  Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step Y876), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in the high probability state The high-probability variation count area for managing the number of games is cleared (step Y877). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are completed, and the state becomes the normal probability state and the normal state.

  Next, the big hit information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), and the high probability final fluctuation flag area is cleared (step Y879). Further, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y881).

  Thereafter, the release flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (step Y882), and the special figure 2 abnormal number area storing the special figure 2 abnormal change number is cleared (step Y883). Further, the special figure 1 change frequency area is cleared to 0 (step Y884), the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing ends. That is, with the occurrence of the big hit, all the information on the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is cleared.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 73 shows the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing (step Y797) in the above-described special figure 1 displaying processing. In the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing, first, “7” related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, one big hit signal output at a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Further, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to ON.

  After that, the small hit information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y896), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing ends. I do.

[Special figure 2 Small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 74 shows the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing (step Y857) in the above-described special figure 2 displaying processing. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing, first, “7” related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y901), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y902).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, one big hit signal output at a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Further, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

  Thereafter, the small hit information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing ends. I do.

[Fanfare / interval processing]
FIG. 75 shows the fanfare / inter-interval processing (steps Y111 and Y142) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step Y951), round winning opening information and round commands corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared (step Y952), and effect command setting processing is performed. Is performed (step Y953).

  Next, the jackpot processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot processing control pointer area (step Y955). The initial value of the big hit processing control pointer is set to 0 when opening and closing are repeated in one round. Here, the 5th R of the 16R certainty change F3 (the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 5 in FIG. 2) corresponds to this. In addition, when performing one continuous opening in one round, 21 which is the big hit operation end value is set. The initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

  Then, the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the processing number (step Y957). The opening time set here is, for example, any of 200 ms, 600 ms, 1600 ms, and 29000 ms.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special hit is the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y958). If the big hit is the special hit (step Y958; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y959). ), The special winning opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y958; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y961), and the special winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y962).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the big win (first special variable winning device 38) is a big hit (step Y963). It is possible to determine from the set special winning opening opening information whether the big winning opening is a big hit. If it is a big win winning opening (step Y963; Y), the processing shift setting processing 1 during the opening of the special winning opening is performed (step Y964), and the processing during the fanfare / interval ends. If the big win is not a big hit opening (step Y963; N), the processing shift setting processing 2 during the big winning opening is performed (step Y965), and the fanfare / interval processing is ended.

[Grand prize opening opening process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 76 shows the processing shift setting processing 1 during the opening of the special winning opening in the above-described processing during the fanfare / interval (step Y964). In the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 1, first, a signal relating to the opening start of the upper winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y971). Here, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper winning port ON data is saved in the large winning port solenoid output data area (step Y972), and the number of winnings to the large winning port is counted. The special winning opening count is cleared (step Y973), and the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 1 ends.

[Grand prize opening opening process shift setting process 2]
FIG. 77 shows the processing shift setting processing 2 (step Y965) during the opening of the special winning opening in the above-described processing during the fanfare / interval. In the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the opening start of the lower winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y981). Here, the special electric accessory 2 in-operation signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, the lower special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y982), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is counted. The special winning opening count is cleared (step Y983), and the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2 ends.

(Processing while opening the big winning opening)
FIG. 78 shows the special winning opening process (steps Y112 and Y143) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing described above. In the processing during opening of the special winning opening, first, the control pointer during the big hit is loaded (step Y1001), and it is determined whether or not the loaded value is equal to or greater than the big hit operation end value (here, 21) (step Y1002).

  If the loaded value is not equal to or larger than the big hit operation end value (here, 21) (step Y1002; N), a big hit operation shift setting process is performed (step Y1003), and the big hit middle processing control pointer is updated by +1 (step Y1004). Then, the special winning opening opening process ends. In this case, the opening / closing is performed during one round, and the opening / closing mode of the special variable winning device is set according to the updated big hit processing control pointer.

  On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the jackpot operation end value (here, 21) (step Y1002; Y), the current round number in the special game state being executed and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area are set. To determine whether the current round is the last round (step Y1005). If it is not the last round (step Y1005; N), an interval command relating to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and effect command setting processing (step Y1008) is performed. In the case of the final round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared (step Y1007), and a rendering command setting process (step Y1008). I do.

  Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is set (step Y1009), and 5 relating to the special winning port remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1010). As the remaining sphere processing time, 600 ms, 800 ms, or 1400 ms is set. Then, it is determined whether or not it is the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1011).

  If it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1011; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1012). Step Y1013). On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1011; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1014), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y1015).

  Thereafter, the OFF data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the processing during opening of the special winning opening is ended. In step Y1016, off data is set for both the upper winning opening solenoid and the lower winning opening solenoid, and the closing process is performed for any winning opening.

[Big hit operation transition setting process]
FIG. 79 shows the jackpot operation shift setting process (step Y1004) in the above-described big winning opening opening process. In the big hit operation shift setting process, first, a branch process is performed depending on whether the value of the big hit mid-process control pointer is an even number or an odd number (step Y1021). Here, branch processing is performed on the assumption that 0 is an even number.

  If the value of the large hit processing control pointer is an even number in step Y1021, a wait time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1022). Here, 1500 ms is set as the wait time. Note that different wait times may be set depending on the value of the pointer. Next, the OFF data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1023), and the flow shifts to step Y1026. In step Y1023, the off data is set for both the upper special winning opening solenoid and the lower special winning opening solenoid, and the closing process is performed for any of the special winning opening.

  On the other hand, if the value of the big hit processing control pointer is an odd number in step Y1021, a special winning opening time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1024). Here, 200 ms is set when the value of the big hit processing control pointer is 1 to 19, and 25000 ms when it is 21, as the special winning opening time. Next, the upper winning opening data is saved in the winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1025), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, only the upper winning prize opening (first special variable winning device 38) repeats opening and closing during one round, so that in step Y1024, ON data is saved for the upper winning prize opening solenoid. are doing. Of course, depending on the setting of the gaming machine, the lower large winning opening (the second special variable winning device 39) may be configured to be repeatedly opened and closed in one round.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y1026), and if it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y1026; Y), the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1026). (Step Y1027), the big hit operation transition setting process ends. If it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1026; N), the set time is saved in the game processing timer area of the special figure 2 (step Y1028), and the big hit operation transition setting processing ends. Through the above processing, opening and closing of the special winning opening can be repeated in one round.

[Grand Winner Remaining Ball Processing]
FIG. 80 shows the special winning port remaining ball processing (steps Y113 and Y144) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing described above. In this special winning port remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the last round. (Step Y1041).

  If the current round in the special gaming state is not the last round (step Y1041; N), a signal regarding the end of opening of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF, and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, an interval time corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds this time is set (step Y1043), and 3 relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step Y1044).

  The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of the round when the remaining ball processing time elapses and further until the interval time elapses after the remaining ball processing time elapses. For example, in the case of the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 in the special figure 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, the interval period is 2000 ms, and in this interval period, the interval effect is displayed on the display device 41 or the like. Is executed.

  On the other hand, if the current round in the special game state is the last round (step Y1041; Y), the big hit end processing shift setting processing is performed (step Y1045), and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y1045). Y1046), 6 relating to the special figure 1 big hit end processing or the special figure 2 big hit end processing is set as the processing number (step Y1047).

  Then, it is determined whether it is the big hit of Toku-zu 1 (step Y1048). In the case of the special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1048; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1048). Y1050), the special winning port remaining ball processing ends. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1048; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area ( Step Y1052), the special winning port remaining ball processing ends.

  The ending period from the end of the last round to the end of the special game state is a period from the end of the last round, when the remaining ball processing time elapses, and further, after the remaining ball processing time elapses, until the ending time elapses. For example, in the case of the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 in the special figure 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, the ending period is 11000 ms. Is executed.

[Big hit end processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 81 shows a jackpot end process shift setting process (step Y1045) in the above-described big winning opening remaining ball process. In the jackpot end processing shift setting processing, first, a signal regarding the end of opening of the special winning opening is saved in a test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF, and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF.

  Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area for storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step Y1072), and the information of the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y1073). ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state (step Y1074).

  Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step Y1075), and the flag for the special winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information for the special winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information in the big hit control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the special winning opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the big hit end processing shift setting processing ends.

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 82 shows the special figure 1 big hit end processing (step Y114) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In the special figure 1 big hit end processing, first, “0” is set as the processing number related to the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y1101), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1102).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1103). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the time reduction state (special symbol fluctuation time reduction state) are saved in the external information output data area (step Y1104). Here, two big hit signals are set to ON. Note that the big hit 2 signal is also ON during the special game state, and this is continued.

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1105). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF. Next, signals related to the start of the high probability state and the time reduction state are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1106). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 change time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 change time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1107). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number with a high probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y1108). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the time is always reduced during the high probability, the numbers in the high probability are used here without distinction. Thereafter, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1109), and the unlit number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1110).

  Next, a flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the upper winning award opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y1111), and a flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the lower winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y1112). The special figure status area is cleared (step Y1113). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

  Thereafter, the high-probability flag is saved in the special-figure game mode flag area (step Y1114), and the initial value (here, 50) is set in the high-probability fluctuation count area for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state. ) Is saved (step Y1115). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1116), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 ms here) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117). ). Then, the upper limit value of the second start memory is set to 4 (step Y1118), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing ends.

  By executing the special figure 1 big hit end processing, the special figure change display game can be started for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is executed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the processing, the special figure 1 variable display game is started by the processing of starting the special figure variable display game in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end processing. Will be able to start earlier. Therefore, in step Y1117, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area so that the start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.

  That is, after the game control device 100 finishes the special game state, the second variable display game execution control unit executes the second variable display game execution control unit until the first variable display game execution control unit can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game. A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the two-variation display game from being made executable.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 83 shows the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. This special figure 2 big hit end processing is the same processing except that step Y1117 in the above special figure 1 big hit processing is not performed.

  First, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure 2 ordinary processing (step Y1121), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1122). Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1123). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time reduction state (variable time reduction state of special symbol) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1124). Here, two big hit signals are set to ON. Note that the big hit 2 signal is also ON during the special game state, and this is continued.

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1125). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF. Next, signals related to the start of the high probability state and the time reduction state are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1127). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number with a high probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y1128). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the time is always reduced during the high probability, the numbers are assigned to the high probability numbers without distinction. Thereafter, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1129), and the unlit number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1130).

  Next, a flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the upper winning award opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y1131), and a flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the lower winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y1132). The special figure status area is cleared (step Y1133). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

  Thereafter, the high-probability flag is saved in the special-figure game mode flag area (step Y1134), and the initial value (here, 50) is stored in the high-probability fluctuation count area for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state. ) Is saved (step Y1135). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power transmission restoration transmission command area (step Y1136), the upper limit value of the second start memory is set to 4 (step Y1137), and the special figure 2 big hit end processing is ended. I do.

  By the special figure 1 big hit processing and the special figure 2 big hit processing, the specific game state which is the high probability state until the special figure change display game is executed 50 times after the end of the first special game state is set. . That is, the specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game becomes a special result is increased over the predetermined period after the end of the special game state. Make Further, the specific game state generating means increases the probability that the result of the variable display game is the first special result over the predetermined period as the specific game state, as compared with the normal state. Further, the upper limit value of the second start memory is changed to 4 after the end of the first special game state. That is, the game control device 100 forms an upper limit value changing unit that can change the upper limit value of the start storage that can be stored.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (steps Y115 and Y146) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 84, in this small hit fanfare middle processing, first, a branch is performed according to an open pattern (step Y1201).

  If the open pattern is small hit 1 (special figure 1 lower big winning opening opening / closing pattern 1) at step Y1201, a small hit opening command of lower big winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) opening is prepared. (Step Y1202), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1203). Next, 8 relating to the small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1204), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1205).

  Thereafter, the small hit opening time 1 (48 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1206), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1207). Here, the special electric accessory 2 in-operation signal is set to ON. Then, the lower winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1208), and the flow shifts to step Y1230.

  If the opening pattern is small hit 2 (special figure 2 lower big winning opening opening / closing pattern 2) in step Y1201, a small hit opening command of lower big winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) opening is issued. It prepares (step Y1209) and performs effect command setting processing (step Y1210). Next, 8 relating to the small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1211), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1212).

  Thereafter, the small hit opening time 2 (1600 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1213), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1214). Here, the special electric accessory 2 in-operation signal is set to ON. Then, the lower winning opening data is saved in the winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1215), and the flow shifts to step Y1230.

  If the opening pattern is small hit 3 (special figure 2 upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 6) in step Y1201, a small hit opening command of upper winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) opening is issued. It prepares (step Y1216) and performs effect command setting processing (step Y1217). Next, 8 relating to the small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1218), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1219).

  Thereafter, the small hit opening time 3 (1200 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1220), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1221). Here, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper winning port ON data is saved in the special winning port solenoid output data area (step Y1222), and the flow shifts to step Y1230.

  If the open pattern is small hit 4 (special figure 2 upper winning prize opening opening / closing pattern 7) in step Y1201, a small hit opening command of opening the upper big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is issued. It prepares (step Y1223) and performs effect command setting processing (step Y1224). Next, 8 relating to the small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1225), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1226).

  Thereafter, the small hit opening time 4 (1600 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1227), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1228). Here, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper winning port on data is saved in the special winning port solenoid output data area (step Y1229), and the flow shifts to step Y1230. After performing the processing according to the type of the small hit, the large winning opening count area for counting the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step Y1230), and the processing during the small hit fanfare is ended.

[Small hit processing]
FIG. 85 shows the small hitting middle processing (steps Y116 and Y147) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the small hitting process, first, a small hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1242). Next, branching is performed according to an open pattern (step Y1243).

  If the open pattern is small hit 1 (special figure 1 lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 1) in step Y1243, 9 is set as the processing number for small hit remaining ball processing (step Y1244), and special figure 1 The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (step Y1245). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1246), and OFF data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1247). The hit processing is terminated.

  If the opening pattern is the small hit 2 (special figure 2 lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 2) at step Y1243, 9 is set as the processing number for the small hit remaining ball processing (step Y1248), and the special figure 2 is set. The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (step Y1249). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1250), and the OFF data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1251). The hit processing is terminated.

  If the opening pattern is 3 or 4 (small winning opening / closing pattern 6 or 7 in FIG. 2) in step Y1243, 9 is set as the processing number for small hit remaining ball processing (step Y1252). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1253). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (800 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1254), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1255). The hit processing is terminated.

  In steps Y1247, Y1251, and Y1255, OFF data is set for both the upper winning opening solenoid and the lower winning opening solenoid, and the closing process is performed for any winning opening.

(Small hit remaining sphere treatment)
FIG. 86 shows the small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117 and Y148) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing described above. In the small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special figure 1 is present (step Y1271). In the case of the special figure 1 small hit (step Y1271; Y), 10 relating to the special figure 1 small hit end processing is set as the processing number (step Y1272), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hit ending time (100 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the flow shifts to step Y1278.

  If the small hit is not the special figure 1 (step Y1271; N), 10 for the special figure 2 small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1275), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time (100 ms here) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the flow shifts to step Y1278.

  Then, a signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal are set to OFF. Further, the large winning opening count area is cleared (step Y1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing ends.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 87 shows the special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y118) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In the special figure 1 small hit ending processing, first, 0 which is related to the special figure 1 ordinary processing is set as the processing number (step Y1301), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1302).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, a flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower winning award opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), a number for turning off the light is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1305). Y1306). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not high probability is in progress (step Y1307). If high probability is in progress (step Y1307; Y), the flow proceeds to step Y1310. If the probability is not high (step Y1307; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1309), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (here, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1310). ), The special figure 1 small hit end processing is ended. Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, so that the start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing. And the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 88 shows the special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. In the special figure 2 small hit ending processing, first, 0 which is related to the special figure 2 usual processing is set as the processing number (step Y1331), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1332).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the upper winning award opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), and the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the lower winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y1335). After that, the number for turning off the light is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1336), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1337). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a high probability is present (step Y1338). If a high probability is present (step Y1338; Y), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated. If the probability is not high (step Y1338; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1339). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1340), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing ends.

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 89 shows the symbol variation control processing (steps Y120 and Y153) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 and setting the display data of the special symbol. In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) is changing (step Y1401).

  If the variation control flag is varying (step Y1402; Y), a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is obtained (step Y1403), and a blink control timer for the symbol to be controlled is obtained. Is updated by -1 (step Y1404), and it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step Y1405).

  If the value of the blink control timer is not 0 (step Y1405; N), the flow shifts to step Y1408. If the value of the blink control timer is 0 (step Y1405; Y), the initial value of the blink control timer (here, 100 ms) is saved in the blink control timer area of the control target (step Y1406), and the symbol of the control target is saved. Is updated by +1 (step Y1407), and display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step Y1408). After that, the obtained display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the variation control flag is not varying (step Y1402; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1409). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (step Y1410), the obtained display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control processing ends. As a result, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

[Segment LED editing process]
FIG. 90 shows the segment LED editing process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this segment LED editing process, the storage display unit 54 provided in the collective display device 50, a round display for displaying the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39). Unit 60, a first game state display unit 77 for notifying the player how to hit the game out of left-hand (normal hit) and right-hand, and a probability state (high-probability state or low-probability state) of the special figure change display game. The setting related to driving of the segment LED constituting the probability display unit 78 to be notified is performed.

  In this segment LED editing process, first, a special figure 1 reserved number table 1 in which the display mode on the storage display unit 54 is defined is set (step X601), and display data corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is acquired. Save in the segment area (step X602). Further, the special figure 2 reservation number table 1 in which the display mode on the storage display unit 54 is defined is set (step X603), and the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X603). X604).

  Next, a round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 is defined is set (step X605), and display data corresponding to the round LED pointer is obtained and saved in the segment area (step X606). Then, the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the probability display section 78 is defined is set (step X607), and display data corresponding to the game state display number is obtained and saved in the segment area (step X608). Thereafter, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 77 is defined is set (step X609), and the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is obtained and saved in the segment area ( Step X610), the segment LED editing process ends.

[Magnet fraud monitoring processing]
FIG. 91 shows the magnet illegal monitoring process (step X113) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and start and end of fraud notification are set.

  In the magnet illegal monitoring process, first, based on the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), the magnet sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is turned on. Is determined (step X611). If the magnet sensor is ON (step X611; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet irregularity monitoring timer that measures the period of detecting abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 to determine whether the timer has timed out. A determination is made (step X613).

  When the timer of the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step X613; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X614), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( Here, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet irregularity notification timer area (step X615). Then, a command for reporting a magnet fraud is prepared (step X616), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X617), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step X613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the magnet sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is not turned on (step X611; N), that is, if abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X618) and the magnet fraud notification time is set. Is not 0, the value is updated by -1 (step X619). Note that the minimum value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is 0 (step X620). When the timer for monitoring unauthorized access to the magnet has not expired (step X613; N), the processing also shifts to the processing of step X619.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X620; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the period of the fraudulent notification has ended or fraud notification has been started from the beginning, If the command has not been performed, a command for ending improper magnet notification is prepared (step X621). Further, a magnet fraud cancellation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X622), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step X623).

  If the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step X623; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step X623; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step X624), effect command setting processing is performed (step X625), and the magnet fraud monitoring processing is ended. I do.

(Panel radio fraud monitoring processing)
FIG. 92 shows the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114) in the above timer interrupt process. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set.

  In this panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the panel radio sensor 62 first detects the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121a. It is determined whether the switch is turned on, that is, an abnormal radio wave is detected (step X631). When the panel radio wave sensor is on (step X631; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (here, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step X632).

  Then, a command for informing the radio wave fraudulent information is prepared (Step X633), and a fraudulent radio wave occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent radio wave flag (Step X634). It is determined whether they match (step X639). That is, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when abnormal radio waves are detected.

  On the other hand, if the panel radio wave sensor is not turned on (step X631; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is updated by -1 unless the timer is 0 (0). Step X635). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step X636).

  If the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is not 0 (step X636; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the panel radio wave irregularity monitoring process ends. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraudulent notification timer is 0 (step X636; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired and the fraudulent notification period has ended or fraudulent notification has been started from the beginning. If it has not been performed, a command for ending the dish radio wave notification is prepared (step X637), and a dish radio unauthorized release flag is prepared as a dish radio illegal flag (step X638). It is determined whether the value matches the value of the invalid flag area (step X639).

  When the prepared panel radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the panel radio wave fraud flag area (step X639; Y), the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step X639; N), the prepared board radio wave illegal flag is saved in the panel radio wave illegal flag area (step X640), the effect command setting process is performed (step X641), and the panel radio wave illegal monitoring is performed. The process ends.

[External information editing processing]
FIG. 93 shows the external information editing process (step X115) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the external information editing processing, monitoring results in the payout command transmission processing (step X105), the winning port switch / state monitoring processing (step X108), the magnet illegal monitoring processing (step X113), the panel radio wave illegal monitoring processing (step X114), and the like. Based on the information, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test shooting test device is created and set in an output buffer.

  In this external information editing process, first, it is determined whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701). If the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step X701; N), the main body frame (front frame 12) is determined. ) It is determined whether an open error is occurring (step X702). If a body frame opening error is not occurring (step X702; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X703), and the security data off data is stored in the external information. The data is saved in the output data area (step X704), and the process proceeds to step X707.

  On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701; Y) or when a body frame (front frame 12) opening error is occurring (step X702; Y), a door / frame opening signal is output. The ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X705), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X706), and the process proceeds to step X707. That is, information that the glass frame 14 and the front frame 12 are open is output as external information.

  Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not 0, -1 is updated (step X707). ). Note that the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0.

  If the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X708; N), that is, if the time is not up, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. Transition. Thus, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information. If the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step X708; Y), it is determined whether or not frame radio wave fraud, which is to detect an abnormal radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12, is occurring. Is determined (step X709).

  If the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; Y), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. If no frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of a switch connector is occurring (step X711). If a switch abnormality error is not occurring (step X711; N), the process proceeds to step X713. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (step X711; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X712), and the process proceeds to step X713.

  Then, a magnet fraud is occurring (Step X713; Y), a board radio wave fraud is occurring (Step X714; Y), a special winning opening fraud is occurring (Step X715; Y), and a special figure 2 abnormal change is occurring (Step X716; Y). ), The ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X718), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X718). X719), and proceeds to step X720. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information. If no error has occurred in any of steps X713 to X716, the OFF data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X717), and the process proceeds to step X720.

  Then, a starting port 1 signal editing process for editing a winning signal to the first starting winning port 36 (step X720) and a starting port 2 signal editing process for editing a winning signal to the second starting winning port 37 (step X721). Do. Next, a main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) for setting information relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a symbol determination frequency signal editing process for setting information relating to the number of executions of the special figure variable display game is performed. (Step X723), the external information editing process ends.

[Start port 1 signal editing process]
FIG. 94 shows the starting port 1 signal editing process (step X720) in the above-described external information editing process. In this start-up port 1 signal editing process, first, if the start-up port 1 signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X731). Note that the minimum value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732). If the value of the start-up port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732; Y), it is determined whether the start-up port 1 signal output count is 0 (step X733).

  If the start port 1 signal output count is not 0 (step X733; N), the start port 1 signal output count is updated by -1 (step X734), and the start port 1 signal output control timer area is output. The control timer initial value is saved (step X735). The initial value of the start-up port 1 signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the on-state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off-state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start-up signal. (For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start-up port 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X737), and the start-up port 1 signal editing process ends. If the start port 1 signal output count is 0 (step X733; Y), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X738). ), End the start-up opening 1 signal editing process.

  On the other hand, if the value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (step X732; N), it is determined whether the starting port 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X736). Note that the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON period when the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start-up port 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X736; Y), the process proceeds to step X737. If the start-up port 1 signal output control timer is not in the output-on section (step X736; N), off data for turning off the start-up port 1 signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X738), and the start-up opening 1 signal editing process ends. Note that the start-up 2 signal editing process (step X721) in the above-described external information editing process performs the same process as the start-up 1 signal editing process for the start-up 2 signal.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
FIG. 95 shows the main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) in the above-described external information editing process. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs a main prize ball signal, which is generated every time the number of prize balls (planned number of payouts) generated by winning in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10), to an external device. Processing.

  In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X741). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is 0 (step X743).

  If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (step X743; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by -1 (step X744), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area outputs the main prize ball signal output. The control timer initial value is saved (step X745). The initial value of the main award ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time of the on state (for example, high level) of the main award ball signal (for example, 128 ms) and the time of the off state (for example, low level) of the main award ball signal (for example, 64 ms). Time (for example, 192 ms). After that, the ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X747), and the main prize ball signal editing process ends. If the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is 0 (step X743; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X743). X748), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main award ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step X742; N), it is determined whether or not the main award ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X746). Here, that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X746; Y), the process proceeds to step X747. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step X746; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

[Symbol decision count signal editing process]
FIG. 96 shows the symbol determination count signal editing process (step X723) in the above-described external information editing process. The symbol determination number signal editing process is a process for controlling the output time of information relating to the number of executions of the special figure change display game.

  In the symbol determination frequency signal editing process, first, if the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X751). The minimum value of the symbol determination count signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol determination count signal output control timer is 0 (step X752). When the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is 0 (step X752; Y), it is determined whether the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency, which is updated by +1 every time the special figure variable display game ends, is 0. (Step X753).

  If the number of times of symbol determination frequency signal output is not 0 (step X753; N), the number of times of symbol determination frequency signal output is updated by -1 (step X754), and the main prize ball signal is output to the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step X755). The initial value of the symbol determination count signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time of the symbol determination count signal in the ON state (for example, high level) (here, 256 ms) and the time of the OFF state (for example, low level) (here, 300 ms). The time is 556 ms here. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, so that the ON state time is set to 256 ms and the OFF state time is set to 300 ms.

  Thereafter, the ON data for turning on the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X7547), and the symbol determination frequency signal editing process is terminated. If the number of times the symbol determination number signal is output is 0 (step X753; Y), off data for turning off the symbol determination number signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X753). X758), the symbol determination count signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not 0 (step X752; N), it is determined whether the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X756). Here, that the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms). If the symbol determination count signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X756; Y), the process proceeds to step X757. If the symbol determination count signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step X756; N), off data for turning off the symbol determination count signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), and ends the symbol determination frequency signal editing process.

  Next, the effect of the game will be described. FIG. 97 shows a display example on the display device 41. These display controls are performed by the effect control device 300 based on the control information received from the game control device 100.

  FIG. 97 (a) shows a display example on the display device 41 during a game in a normal game state. A game mode display section 80 for displaying a game state is provided at an upper right portion of the display area. Here, a “normal stage” indicating that the game is in the normal game state is displayed. In the center of the display area, a decorative special figure 1 variable display game display section 81 for displaying the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is provided. Here, the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is displayed by variably displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information.

  A decorative special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 for displaying a decorative special figure 2 variable display game is provided at the lower right of the display area. Here, ○ and-are used as identification information, these are alternately displayed in the variable display, and thereafter, in the case of a special result, ○ is displayed, and in the case of a missing result,-is displayed in a stop, so that the decorative special figure 2 variable display is displayed. Display the game.

  At the lower center of the display area, there is provided a storage display unit 83 for displaying a decorative start storage display corresponding to the first start storage. The decorative start memory display displayed here corresponds to the first start memory on a one-to-one basis, and is displayed in the order of storage, and here indicates that there are four first start memories. The decoration start storage display at the left end is the decoration start storage display corresponding to the first start storage stored first, and shifts to the left each time the decoration start storage display is performed. In addition, it is possible to suggest the result of the pre-reading such as the result of the special figure 1 change display game and the change pattern corresponding to each start memory by the display mode.

  At the center lower portion of the display area and to the left of the storage display unit 83, there is provided a running storage display unit 84 that displays information related to start storage corresponding to the currently running special figure 1 variable display game. At the start of the special figure 1 change display game, the decoration start storage display at the left end of the storage display section 83 is shifted to the in-execution storage display section 84, and the result and the change pattern of the special figure 1 change display game to be executed are displayed. Is indicated by the display mode.

  FIG. 97 (b) shows a display example on the display device 41 during a game in a specific game state. At the upper left of the display area, there is provided a game number information display section 85 indicating information on the number of games in the specific game state. “LAST” indicates the number of remaining games that can be executed in a specific game state, and “TOTAL” indicates the number of games executed in a series of specific game states.

  Although the numerical value displayed on the game number information display section 85 does not necessarily need to match the actual game number, the effect control device 300 manages the actual game number within the effect control device 300. The display content on the game number information display section 85 is set based on the game number information display section 85. The effect control device 300 manages the information on the number of remaining games by subtracting the number of remaining games in the specific game state each time the decorative special figure variable display game is executed. Is set based on

  On the right side of the game number information display section 85, a game mode display section 80 for displaying a game state is provided. Here, "pounding RUSH" indicating that the game is in the specific game state is displayed. On the right side of the game mode display section 80, a right-handed instruction display 86 is provided to inform that the right-handed is advantageous for the player. On the right side of the right strike instruction display 86, a storage display section 83 and a decorative special figure 1 change display game display section 81 are provided. Here, the first start storage number is displayed by a numeral. The decorative special figure 1 change display game display section 81 and the storage display section 83 may not be displayed in a state where the special figure 1 change display game is not executed.

  Below the decorative special figure 1 change display game display section 81, an acquired number display section 87 indicating the number of prize balls acquired in a series of specific game states is provided. In the acquired number display section 87, one prize ball is displayed as 1 pt, which indicates that 1234 prize balls have been acquired. In the center of the display area, the number of prize balls is displayed based on the prize in the special variable prize device, and is added to the acquired number display section 87.

  In the acquired number display section 87, the special game state based on the first special result generated in the low probability state from the start of the special game state that triggered the start of the specific game state to the end of a series of specific game states, The number of prize balls acquired during the period from the start of the game until the game falls to the low probability state by executing the predetermined number of special figure change display games without deriving the first special result during the specific game state is displayed. In this period, it is added as needed every time a prize ball is obtained. The number of prize balls acquired in the special game state based on the first special result and the number of prize balls acquired in the special game state based on the second special result may be displayed separately, or only one of them may be displayed. You may do it. Alternatively, only the number of prize balls based on winning in the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 may be displayed, or the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, The number of prize balls based on winning in the general winning opening 35 may also be displayed.

  A decorative special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 for displaying a decorative special figure 2 variable display game is provided at the lower right of the display area. The display position of the decorative special figure 2 change display game display section 82 is the same as that in the normal game state. At the lower left of the display area, there is provided a storage display section 89 for displaying a decorative start storage display corresponding to the second start storage. The storage display unit 89 includes a decorative start storage display 89a displayed in a storage order corresponding to the second start storage in a one-to-one correspondence, and a second start storage that can be stored corresponding to the upper limit of the second start storage. And an upper limit notification display 89b indicating the number.

  The upper limit value notification display 89b is a frame-shaped display, and indicates the second start storage number that can be stored by displaying the number corresponding to the upper limit value. Here, four upper limit value notification displays 89b are shown, indicating that the upper limit value is 4. The decorative start storage display 89a corresponds to the second start storage on a one-to-one basis and is displayed side by side in the storage order. One decorative start storage display 89a is displayed for one frame-shaped upper limit notification display 89a. Can be displayed. Here, it is shown that there are three second start memories. The decoration start storage display 89a on the left end is the decoration start storage display 89a corresponding to the second start storage stored first, and shifts to the left every time it is consumed. Further, by changing the display mode of the decorative start memory display 89a corresponding to each second start memory based on the result of the pre-reading process for the second start memory, the special figure 2 change based on the corresponding second start memory is performed. It is possible to suggest a pre-read result such as a display game result or a fluctuation pattern.

  In addition, an effect symbol display section 88 for displaying an effect symbol corresponding to the special figure change display game is provided at the lower center of the display area. The effect symbol is displayed in the left, middle, and right variable display areas in a variable manner, and then stopped and displayed, thereby performing an effect corresponding to the special figure variable display game. The fluctuation and stop of the effect design do not always correspond to the fluctuation and stop of the special figure fluctuation display game. This effect symbol can be executed simultaneously, and one of the special results is changed to a special result, and the other is forcibly stopped due to a disconnection result. It is intended to make it easy for people to understand.

  That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes a receiving device capable of receiving control information from the transmitting device (game control device 100), and based on the control information received by the receiving device, the decoration variation display game (decoration special figure) (A variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game). In addition, in the specific game state, the effect control device 300 executes the decoration variation display game corresponding to the first variation display game (the special figure 1 variation display game) or the second variation display game (the special figure 2 variation display game). And a subtraction means for subtracting the number of times of execution of the variable display game from the predetermined number of times each time. Further, in the specific game state, the effect control device 300 variably displays a plurality of effect identification information and stops and displays the plurality of effect identification information without corresponding to the execution of the decorative change display game, in accordance with the number of subtractions of the subtraction means. Of the effect identification information change display means that can be executed. Further, the effect control device 300 constitutes game number information notifying means capable of notifying game number information which is information according to the subtraction result by the subtracting means.

  FIG. 98 shows the execution of the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game, and the change in the display of the effect symbol and the number-of-games information display section 85. FIG. 99 shows the display on the display device 41. Was. In the ending period (t31) of the first special game state shown in FIG. 98, a notification that the specific game state is started is made as shown in FIG. 99 (a), and the specific game state is displayed on the game number information display section 85. The remaining number of games that can be executed in the state (50 times) is displayed.

  Here, at the end of the first special game state, there are three first start memories, and as shown in FIG. 98, the special figure 1 variable display game is started with the end of the first special game state, and the decorative special figure is displayed. The one-variation display game is also started (t32). Further, with the end of the first special game state, a game ball is awarded in the second starting winning opening 37, the special figure 2 variable display game is started, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is also started (t32). . That is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed. Here, it is shown that the special figure 1 variable display game is started at the same time, but actually the special figure 1 variable display game is performed after the end of the special game state. Is started, the special figure 2 variable display game is started.

  The special figure 2 variable display game ends (t35) before the scheduled end time (t37) of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the result is a small hit. Therefore, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the loss when the special figure 2 variable display game ends (t35).

  Here, if the progress of the game is displayed only in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, and the game number information display section 85, the conventional gaming machine which does not simultaneously execute the special figure variable display game It may be difficult for a player who is used to the game to understand the progress of the game. Therefore, using a design symbol for displaying the progress of the game with a display like a conventional gaming machine that does not simultaneously execute the special figure change display game, the game number information display section 85 is changed according to the progress of the design symbol. Makes it easy to grasp the progress of the game.

  First, with the start of the special figure 1 change display game, the effect symbol display unit 88 starts to display the change of the effect symbols. Accordingly, the remaining game number (LAST) is set to 49 and the number of executed games (TOTAL) is set to 1 in the game number information display section 85 (t32). In this example, the first special result is derived in the normal game state, the first special game state is executed, and the specific game state is started after the end of the first special game state. Is one. When the special game state occurs in the specific game state, the specific game state is continuous, and thus the value is obtained by adding 1 to the number of executed games before the start of the special game state.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (b), even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started thereafter, the variable display of the effect symbols is maintained as it is, and the display content of the game number information display section 85 does not change. In the drawing, ○ and-are simultaneously displayed to show the variable display, but in practice, ○ and-are alternately displayed to perform the variable display. Since the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the special figure 2 variable display game, the setting of the display content of the effect symbol is changed based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. It becomes. Further, the upper limit of the second start memory is set to 4 with the start of the specific game state, a corresponding number of upper limit notification displays 89b are displayed, and a decorative start memory display corresponding to the current second start memory number is displayed. 89a is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the effect symbol currently displayed in the fluctuation display due to this change stops before the end of the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (t33). As shown in FIG. 99 (c), the stop symbol at this time is a stop symbol indicating a loss. At this time, only the effect symbol is stopped, and the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are still displayed in a variable manner.

  In addition, the stop symbol of the effect symbol at this time is not only a stop symbol indicating that it is out of position, but also suggests or informs that a special result will be derived at the next stop as "NEXT" or "attention". Is also good. Further, as a variation pattern of the decorative special figure variable display game, a re-variable display in which the variable display is started again after temporarily stopping in the decorative special figure variable display game in a result mode other than the special result mode in the middle of the special figure variable display game. When the so-called pseudo continuous change display mode of performing one or more times can be executed, the effect at the time of stopping and restarting the effect symbol may be the same effect as the temporary stop and the re-variable display in the pseudo continuous change display mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 98, the variation display of the effect symbol is started again (t34). At this time, the display of the game number information display section 85 is updated, and the number of remaining games (LAST) becomes 48 and the number of executed games (TOTAL) becomes 2 (FIG. 99 (d)). Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are stopped, the variable display of the effect symbol is stopped (t35). As shown in FIG. 99 (e), the stop symbol at this time is a stop symbol indicating a small hit. The decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game also stop the variable display and display the result mode.

  By changing the setting of the display pattern of the effect symbols in this way, the progress of the special figure change display game is displayed in the same display form as that of a conventional gaming machine that does not simultaneously execute the special figure change display game. In other words, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t32), the effect symbols are continuously changed and displayed until the special figure 1 variable display game is scheduled to stop (t37) and stopped to perform one special figure variable display. Although it was planned to show that the game was played, the setting of the display contents of the effect symbols is changed based on the start (t32) of the special figure 2 variable display game thereafter. In this change, it is changed so as to stop once (t33) before the end of the special figure 2 variable display game and restart the change (t34), and to stop at the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t35). I have. That is, the design symbols are stopped in accordance with the number of subtractions (here, 2) by the subtraction means from the start to the stop of the special figure change display game, which triggered the start of the change of the design symbols. ing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98, the second special game state is started, and the first special variable winning device 38 is opened. As shown in FIG. 99 (f), in the special game state, the number of prize balls is displayed with the prize in the special variable prize device, and is added to the acquired number display section 87. Thereafter, when the second special game state ends, the special figure change display game can be executed (t38). At t38 to t39 and t39 to t40, the game proceeds in the same manner as at t32 to t38 described above.

  Further, when only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed without the first start memory, the change and stop of the effect design are simultaneous with the change and stop of the special figure 2 variable display game (t40 to t41). . Also, when only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, the change and stop of the effect symbol are simultaneously with the change and stop of the special figure 1 variable display game.

  If the special figure 1 variable display game is executed simultaneously with the special figure 1 variable display game, and if the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is If it is a loss, the special design 1 is stopped with the stop of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the variable display is performed again. In addition, if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a special result, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped due to a loss result, and thus the effect symbols are stopped before the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped. Is displayed again, and the game is stopped when the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped.

  From the above, the effect control means (effect control device 300) executes the decorative variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) corresponding to the first variable display game or the second variable display game in the specific game state. Subtraction means (effect control device 300) for subtracting the number of times of execution of the variable display game from the predetermined number of times each time, and a plurality of effect identification information (effects Effect display device (effect control device 300) capable of executing the variable display of the display pattern and stopping the display in accordance with the subtraction number of the subtraction device. In the specific game state, the means is configured to change the decoration in response to the execution of the first end control process in the first variable display game based on the special result of the second variable display game. When the display game is completed, the variable display and the stop display corresponding to the first variable display game and the second variable display game are performed by the end of the display game, and subtraction by the subtraction means is performed for each variable display game. That is, it is possible to notify the player of the fact.

  In addition, the effect identification information change display means displays the decoration change display game in response to the execution of the first end control process in the first change display game based on the special result of the second change display game. When ending, the variable display and the stop display corresponding to the first variable display game are performed before the end, and then the variable display corresponding to the second variable display game is performed. That is, the stop display corresponding to the game is performed.

  Next, a description will be given of a change in the upper limit value of the second start storage in the specific game state. FIG. 100 shows an example of a change in the upper limit value of the second start storage when a specific game state occurs. In the normal game state other than the specific game state, the upper limit of the second start memory is 0 which is the first upper limit. That is, the second start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game does not occur. However, a temporary second start memory for starting the special figure 2 variable display game can be generated.

  In this example, the special figure 1 variable display game is started in the normal game state (t201), the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, and the first special game state is started (t202). When the special game state ends, the specific game state starts (t203). The first condition for increasing the upper limit is established with the start of the specific game state, and the upper limit of the second start storage is changed from 0 of the first upper limit to 4 of the second upper limit. That is, up to four second start memories for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game can be stored. In addition, the display device 41 displays four upper limit value notification displays 89b, indicating that the upper limit value of the second start storage is 4.

  The number of executions of the special figure change display game that can be executed in the specific game state is 50, and the number of remaining games at the start of the specific game state is 50 (t203). This remaining game number is subtracted by the start of the special figure change display game, and becomes 49 by starting the first special figure change display game in the specific game state (t204), and the second special figure change display in the specific game state. It becomes 48 by starting the game (t205). As described above, even when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, the number of remaining games is subtracted. Further, in this example, it is assumed that no new big hit occurs in the specific game state, and all the special figure 2 variable display games in the specific game state have small hits (the small hits between the special figure 2 variable display games respectively). (Operating (opening / closing of the special winning opening) is performed but omitted).

  The game in the specific game state progresses, and the 46th special figure change display game is started in the specific game state, so that the number of remaining games becomes four (t206). Here, the upper limit value of the second start memory remains at 4. Then, by starting the 47th special figure fluctuation display game in the specific game state, the number of remaining games becomes three (t207), and the second condition for starting a predetermined period in which the upper limit value is reduced is established accordingly. The upper limit of the second start memory is changed to 3. Further, the display device 41 has three upper limit value notification displays 89b, which indicates that the upper limit value of the second start storage is 3.

  Thereafter, each time the special figure change display game is executed, the upper limit value of the second start memory is decremented. By starting the 48th special figure change display game in the specific game state, the number of remaining games is reduced. It becomes 2 (t208), and accordingly, the upper limit value of the second start memory is changed to 2. In addition, the display device 41 has two upper limit value notification displays 89b, which indicates that the upper limit value of the second start storage is 2. Further, by starting the 49th special figure change display game in the specific game state, the number of remaining games becomes one (t209), and accordingly, the upper limit value of the second start memory is changed to one. Further, the display device 41 has only one upper limit value notification display 89b, which indicates that the upper limit value of the second start storage is 1.

  Then, by starting the 50th special figure fluctuation display game in the specific game state, the number of remaining games becomes zero (t210), and accordingly, the upper limit of the second start memory is changed to the first upper limit of zero. . With the end of the special figure change display game, the specific game state ends and the normal game state is set (t211). In the normal game state, the upper limit of the second start memory is 0. In addition, the display device 41 ends the display of the upper limit value notification display 89b, and indicates that the upper limit value of the second start storage is 0.

  By changing the upper limit value of the start memory in this way, it is possible to provide unprecedented playability, and to improve the interest of the game. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the special figure variable display game (main change) is mainly the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure variable display game (the special figure 2 variable display game is not the main game). Irregular fluctuation). For the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state, only a very long variable time is selected so that the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time, and the special figure The game progresses mainly in the one-variation display game.

  Therefore, in the normal game state, the upper limit value of the second start memory is set to 0 which is the first upper limit value, so that the second start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is prevented from being generated, so that a plurality of special memories are provided. FIG. 2 prevents the variable display game from being continuously executed for a long time. Also. Even if the player wins the second start winning opening 37 during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, the player cannot acquire the execution right of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is disadvantageous for the player. The game can be made to progress mainly in the display game.

  On the other hand, in the specific game state, the special figure change display game (main change) is mainly the special figure change display game, and the special figure change display game (irregular change) is not the special figure 1 change display game. ). If the upper limit of the second start memory is set to 0 as in the normal game state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the very short fluctuation time is set in the specific game state may be interrupted. By setting the upper limit of the memory to be the second upper limit of 4, a second start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game can be generated, and the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted. Can be.

  In addition, the upper limit value of the second start memory is reduced stepwise each time the special figure change display game is executed in the predetermined period before the end of the specific game state, so that the stored second start memory is used up to be specified. It is possible to end the gaming state. In addition, the fact that the upper limit value of the second start memory becomes 0 can be notified step by step, and the change of the upper limit value of the second start memory can be easily understood by the player.

  Further, at the end of the specific game state, the upper limit value of the second start memory can be set to 0. Therefore, after shifting to the normal game state based on the second start memory generated during the specific game state, the special figure 2 variable display game Can be prevented from being started. When the special figure 2 variable display game is started after shifting to the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game has a very long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes), but with the end of the specific game state. Many players end the game. In this case, there is a risk that a special game state may occur in an unmanned gaming machine. However, such an event can be prevented by setting the upper limit of the second start memory to 0 at the end of the specific game state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 100, only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in the period before the end of the specific game state, but the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in this period. In some cases. FIG. 101 shows such an example. Also in this example, it is assumed that no new big hit occurs in the specific game state, and that all the special figure 2 variable display games in the specific game state have small hits.

  The game in the specific game state progresses, and by starting the special figure 2 variable display game which is the 46th special figure variable display game in the specific game state, the number of remaining games becomes four (t221). Here, the upper limit value of the second start memory is 4, and four second start memories a, b, c, and d are stored. Of these, the second start memory a is the oldest and is stored in the order of a, b, c, and d. At this time, the first start memory is zero.

  With the start of the special figure 2 change display game, the change of the effect symbol starts, and the display of the game number information display section 85 is updated, the number of remaining games (LAST) becomes 4, and the number of executed games (TOTAL) ) Becomes 46. The variation of the effect symbol is stopped at the stop symbol indicating that the small hit is achieved with the end of the special figure 2 variation display game (t222).

  Then, the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory a is started as the 47th special figure variable display game in the specific game state (t223). Accordingly, the number of remaining games becomes 3, the upper limit of the second start memory is changed to 3, and b, c, and d are stored as the second start memory. In this state, since the second start memory has reached the upper limit value, the second start memory is not stored even if a game ball newly wins in the second start winning opening 37. In addition, with the start of the special figure change display game, the change of the effect design starts, and the display of the number-of-games information display section 85 is updated, the number of remaining games (LAST) becomes 3, and the number of executed games ( TOTAL) is 47.

  During the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, a game ball wins in the first starting winning opening 36, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started (t224). Accordingly, the number of remaining games becomes two, and the upper limit of the second start memory is changed to two. At this time, b, c, and d are stored as the second start memories, but since the upper limit value is exceeded, the newest second start memory d is invalidated, and b and c are stored as the second start memories. The state is stored. It should be noted that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result due to a small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game (t228).

  With respect to the effect symbols, the effect symbols start to fluctuate with the start of the special figure 2 change display game based on the second start memory a, the display of the game number information display section 85 is updated, and the remaining game number (LAST) ) Becomes 3, and the number of executed games (TOTAL) becomes 47 (t223). At this time, the variation of the effect symbol was to be stopped at the stop symbol indicating the small hit with the end of the special figure 2 variation display game based on the second startup memory a. Based on the fact that the game ball wins and the special figure 1 change display game is started, it stops at the stop symbol indicating that the change of the effect symbol is out of change (t224), and then starts a new change. (T225). At this time, the display of the number-of-games information display section 85 is not updated, and the number of remaining games (LAST) is 3 and the number of executed games (TOTAL) is 47.

  Further, before the end of the special figure 2 change display game based on the second start memory a, the change is stopped at the stop symbol indicating that the change of the effect symbol is out of change (t226), and thereafter, the change is newly started. (T227). At this time, the display of the game number information display section 85 is updated, the remaining game number (LAST) is set to 2, and the execution game number (TOTAL) is set to 48. Then, with the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the second start memory a, the fluctuation of the effect symbol is stopped at the stop symbol indicating that it is a small hit (t228).

  In other words, the effect symbols for the period from t223 to t228 correspond to the invalidated second start memory d in addition to the fluctuation and stop corresponding to the executed special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 variable display game. It also fluctuates and stops. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from having a feeling of incompatibility with the invalidation of the second start memory.

  Then, the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory b is started as the 49th special figure variable display game in the specific game state (t229). Accordingly, the number of remaining games becomes 1, the upper limit value of the second start memory is changed to 1, and a state in which c is stored as the second start memory is obtained. In addition, along with the start of the special figure change display game, the change of the effect design starts, and the display of the game number information display section 85 is updated, the remaining game number (LAST) becomes 1, and the number of executed games ( TOTAL) is 49.

  Further, the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory c is started as the 50th special figure variable display game in the specific game state (t230). Accordingly, the number of remaining games becomes 0, the upper limit value of the second start memory is changed to 0, and the second start memory is not stored. In addition, with the start of the special figure change display game, the change of the effect symbol starts, and the display of the game number information display section 85 is updated, the remaining game number (LAST) becomes 0, and the number of executed games ( TOTAL) becomes 50. Thereafter, the special game state ends with the end of the special figure change display game, and the normal game state is set (t231). In the normal game state, the upper limit of the second start memory is 0.

  In this way, by invalidating the second start memory exceeding the upper limit value, the second start memory number becomes 0 before the end of the specific game state, and the second start memory does not remain after the end of the specific game state. You can do so.

  In order to prevent the player from being aware of the existence of the invalid second start memory, during the period in which the upper limit of the second start memory is reduced before the end of the specific game state, the game number information display section 85 Then, the number of executed games and the number of remaining games may not be specified. For example, as shown in FIG. 111 to be described later, “preparing” is displayed, or the display of the game number information display unit 85 is ended.

  Further, during the specific game state, the start-up memory display 90 for effect that displays the start-up memory in a simulated manner is displayed, so that it is difficult to grasp the actual number of start-up memories, and the existence of the second start-up memory which becomes invalid becomes invalid. The player may not be conscious. FIG. 102 and FIG. 103 show examples of displaying the effect start storage display. The control of the effect start storage display 90 is also performed by the effect control device 300 based on information received from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 forms a start storage display unit that displays information related to start storage.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (a), during the ending period of the first special game state, a notification that the specific game state is started is performed, and as shown in FIG. 102 (b), the game in the specific game state is started. You. Here, ten effect start memory displays 90 simulating a flame are displayed in line as effect start memory displays 90. That is, a plurality of effect start memory displays 90 that are larger than the upper limit of the start memory are displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (c), the effect start storage display 90 for the effect is such that the effect start memory display 90 located at the left end shifts to a display imitating the background flame at the start timing of the change of the effect symbol. By doing so, an effect display equivalent to the start of the special figure change display game is performed by the effect start memory display 90 and the effect symbol with the exhaustion of the special figure start memory. However, the number of the production start storage displays 90 does not match the actual start storage number, and when the production start storage display 90 located at the left end shifts to a display imitating the background flame, it is arranged in a line. The arranged production start storage displays 90 move to the left, and a new production start storage display 90 is displayed at the right end, so that there are always ten production start storage displays 90. In other words, a part of the effect start memory display 90 corresponds one-to-one with the start memory, and as an effect relating to the start memory, which is one of the predetermined effects performed in the effect start memory display 90, the start memory is consumed. Accordingly, an effect of deleting one of the effect start storage displays 90 is performed. It should be noted that a notification area for displaying the effect start storage display 90 corresponding to the currently running special figure change display game is separately set, and the effect start storage display 90 at the left end is displayed in the notification area as the start memory is consumed. To notify information (a result, a change pattern, and the like) relating to the running special figure change display game by changing the display mode.

  In this way, the effect start display memory 90 and the effect design perform the effect display equivalent to the start of the special figure change display game as the special figure start memory is exhausted, thereby changing the actual start memory number. Is displayed, the progress of the game, which is difficult to understand, can be easily understood by the player.

  Note that, as an effect to notify the possibility that the special figure change display game to be executed is a big hit, the flame of the background may be changed when the effect start storage display 90 moves to the background, For example, the higher the possibility of a big hit, the larger the background flame may be. Furthermore, as a continuous effect based on the pre-reading result, the effect start storage display 90 corresponding to the target special figure start memory may be changed to a specific color, or a plurality of specific colors may be set, The specific color set according to the degree of expectation may be different. A plurality of effect start storage displays 90 including the effect start memory display 90 corresponding to the target special figure start memory may be collectively changed to a specific color. The background flame may be sequentially increased toward the special figure change display game based on the memory. In addition, the size of the background flame in the case where the effect of notifying the possibility of the big hit is not executed is gradually reduced toward the end of the specific game state, and is visually identified. Make it possible to know how many times the game state remains.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (d), the game progresses and the forty-fifth special figure change display game in the specific game state ends, and as shown in FIG. 102 (e), the forty-sixth special figure change display game ends. The special figure 2 variable display game which is the special figure variable display game is started. The following description of the progress of the game will be made assuming that the game progresses as shown in FIG. The state of FIG. 102 (e) is t221 in FIG. In the effect start storage display 90, the effect start memory display 90 at the left end shifts to the background flame in accordance with the change of the effect design following the start of the special figure change display game, and the current start position display 90 is sequentially displayed from the left end. The number (four in this case) of production start storage displays 90 corresponding to the two start storage numbers is changed to a specific color different from the others. Further, the display of the storage display units 83 and 89 ends here, and the game mode display unit 80 is changed to the display of “pounding RUSH climax” indicating that the upper limit value of the second start storage is decreasing.

  This special figure 2 change display game ends with a small hit result, and the change of the effect design stops at the stop symbol indicating that it is a small hit together with the end of the special figure 2 change display game as shown in FIG. 102 (f). (T222 in FIG. 101). Thereafter, the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory a is started as the 47th special figure variable display game in the specific game state (t223 in FIG. 101). Accordingly, the number of remaining games becomes 3, the upper limit of the second start memory is changed to 3, and b, c, and d are stored as the second start memory. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), with the start of the special figure change display game, the effect start storage display 90 at the left end shifts to the background flame, and the change of the effect symbol starts.

  During the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, a game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started (t224 in FIG. 101). Accordingly, the number of remaining games becomes two, and the upper limit of the second start memory is changed to two. At this time, b, c, and d are stored as the second start memories, but since the upper limit value is exceeded, the newest second start memory d is invalidated, and b and c are stored as the second start memories. The state is stored.

  Based on the winning of the game ball into the first start winning opening 36, the effect start storage display 90 which is set to the specific color is increased by one as shown in FIG. 103 (b) (t224 in FIG. 101). That is, in the effect start storage display 90, the number including the invalidated second start memory is set as the specific color. Further, based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 36, the game is stopped at the stop symbol indicating that the variation of the effect symbol is out of the range, and thereafter, the effect at the left end as shown in FIG. 103 (c). The start-up memory display 90 moves to the background flame, and the variation of the effect symbol is newly started (t225 in FIG. 101).

  Further, before the end of the special figure 2 change display game based on the second start memory a, the game stops at the stop symbol indicating that the fluctuation of the effect symbol is out of order as shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (e), the effect start storage display 90 at the left end shifts to the background flame, and the effect symbol effect is newly started (t227 in FIG. 101). Then, with the end of the special figure 2 change display game based on the second start memory a, as shown in FIG. 103 (f), the change of the effect symbol stops at the stop symbol indicating that it is a small hit (FIG. 101). T228). Then, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the second start memory b is started as the 49th special figure fluctuation display game in the specific game state, and the effect start memory display 90 at the left end as shown in FIG. Moves to the background flame, and the variation of the effect design is newly started (t229 in FIG. 101).

  In other words, the effect symbols for the period from t223 to t228 in FIG. 101 are not only the fluctuation and stop corresponding to the executed special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 variable display game, but also the invalidated second start memory d. Fluctuating and stopping corresponding to. In this way, in order to change and stop the effect symbols, the effect start memory display 90 sets the specific color to the number obtained by adding the invalid start second memory to the actual start memory number, The effect start memory display 90 moves to the background flame, and the effect symbol effect is newly started. Thereby, the generated start memories are sequentially consumed and it looks as if the special figure change display game is being executed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the second start memory being invalidated. Can be. Such a display also provides an effect related to the start memory, which is one of the predetermined effects performed by the effect start memory display 90.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (e), the timing at which the display of the storage display units 83 and 89 is ended and a part of the effect start storage display 90 is set to the specific color is based on the number of remaining games in the specific game state. The timing may be earlier than four. Further, it may be changed sequentially at a plurality of timings. Further, in FIG. 102 (e), the number (four in this example) of the effect start storage displays 90 corresponding to the current second start storage number is changed to a specific color different from the others. Regardless of the starting memory number, the number may be set to 4 (here, 4) according to the number of remaining games in the specific game state. Further, in consideration of the occurrence of the first start memory in advance, the number may be larger than the current second start memory number or the remaining game number in the specific game state. In this case, if the first start memory does not occur, for example, a plurality of effect symbols are changed and stopped in the special figure 2 change display game which is the last time of the specific game state.

  Also, at the start of the specific game state or during the specific game state, the actual remaining game number is displayed on the game number information display section 85 as shown in FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (d). 102, the remaining game number may be displayed as the remaining game number until the start of the state in which it is difficult to grasp the starting storage number as shown in FIG. That is, in the example of FIG. 102, the number of remaining games may be 45 at the time of FIG. 102 (a) and LAST0 at the time of FIG. 102 (d).

  At the time of FIG. 102 (a), the number-of-games information display unit 85 notifies the number (for example, 10) smaller than 45, and performs an additional effect (for example, +10) to increase the number of remaining games as needed. You may do it. Also, as one of the predetermined effects performed by the effect start storage display 90, the effect start storage display 90 is sequentially changed to a specific color at a predetermined timing even in the state of FIGS. 102 (b) to 102 (d). For example, an effect of increasing the number of remaining games by 10 may be performed as an additional effect when all of the ten effect start storage displays 90 have a specific color.

  In addition, as an effect related to the start memory, which is one of the predetermined effects performed in the effect start memory display 90, when the effect start memory display 90 shifts to a display imitating the background flame in accordance with the start of the change of the effect symbol. Then, the display mode of the effect start storage display 90 may be changed to suggest or notify the stop result of the effect symbol. Basically, the movement of the production start memory display 90 to the background corresponds to the digestion of the start memory, and the stop result of the design for production corresponds to the result of the special figure change display game based on the start memory. Changing or changing the display mode of the start memory display 90 to indicate or notify the stop result of the effect symbol means indicating or notifying the stop result of the started special figure variable display game.

  In addition, as a look-ahead effect that suggests or informs about a look-ahead result of a specific second start memory in a specific game state, when performing a look-ahead effect in a period over a special figure change display game based on the specific second start memory, The same number of effect start storage displays 90 as the second number of start storages consumed in the period may be changed to a specific color to indicate the period in which the prefetch effect is performed. By doing in this way, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that a big hit will occur in the special figure variation display game in which the effect start storage display 90 of the specific color is finally consumed. As shown in FIG. 102 (e), a specific color when the display of the storage display sections 83 and 89 is ended and a part of the production start storage display 90 is made a specific color, and a period during which the pre-reading production is performed May be another color. This makes it possible to display the period in which the prefetch effect is performed even in the period after FIG. 102 (e).

  From the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37) provided in the game area 32, and the result of the variable display game is performed. When a special result is obtained, a predetermined random number is extracted based on the winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening in a gaming machine that generates a special game state in which a game value can be given to a player, and the predetermined random number is extracted. Display game (game control device 100) capable of storing up to an upper limit value as a start memory, and a variable display game execution control capable of controlling execution of a variable display game based on the start memory stored in the start storage. Means (game control device 100), and the start storage means includes an upper limit value changing means (game control device 100) capable of changing the upper limit value of the memorable start memory. Therefore, by changing the upper limit value of the start memory, it is possible to provide a new level of amusement, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the start storage means is configured such that, when the upper limit value is reduced by the upper limit value changing means, only the start storage from the oldest storage order to the upper limit value is made valid for the start storage already stored. Will be. Therefore, it is possible to set the number of start storages according to the upper limit value.

  In addition, a specific game state generating means (game control device 100) for generating a specific game state over a period of executing the variable display game a predetermined number of times is provided, and the upper limit value changing means sets the upper limit value with the start of the specific game state. The first upper limit is increased to the second upper limit, and the upper limit is decreased from the second upper limit to the first upper limit in a predetermined period before the end of the specific gaming state. Therefore, the specific game state can be set as an advantageous period for the player.

  Further, the upper limit value changing means may determine that the remaining number of times of the variable display game that can be executed in the specific game state is smaller than the second upper limit value, and that the remaining number of times varies with the decrease of the remaining number of times so that the upper limit value matches. Thus, the upper limit value is reduced so that the upper limit value becomes the first upper limit value. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the upper limit number while using the stored start memory.

  Further, the upper limit value changing means increases the upper limit value from the first upper limit value to the second upper limit value based on the establishment of the first condition, and increases the upper limit value in the predetermined period started based on the establishment of the second condition. It will be reduced from 2 upper limit values to 1st upper limit value. The first condition is that the specific game state is started by the specific game state generating means, and the second condition is that the remaining number of variable display games that can be executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number (here, 3). It is to become.

  In addition, a start memory display unit (effect control device 300) for displaying information related to start memory is provided, and the start memory display unit can display a plurality of effect start memory displays 90 larger than the upper limit value. A part of the memory display 90 is made to correspond one-to-one with the start memory, and a predetermined effect is performed in the effect start memory display 90. In addition, an effect relating to the starting memory is performed as one of the predetermined effects.

  Note that, when the upper limit value is reduced, the second start memory that exceeds the upper limit value may be enabled. FIG. 104 shows an example in which the second start memory which exceeds the upper limit value is made effective. The game in the specific game state progresses, and the 46th special figure change display game is started in the specific game state, so that the number of remaining games becomes four (t241). Here, the upper limit value of the second start memory is 4, and four second start memories a, b, c, and d are stored. Of these, the second start memory a is the oldest and is stored in the order of a, b, c, and d. At this time, the first start memory is zero.

  Thereafter, the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory a is started as the 47th special figure variable display game in the specific game state (t242). Accordingly, the number of remaining games becomes 3, the upper limit of the second start memory is changed to 3, and b, c, and d are stored as the second start memory. In this state, since the second start memory has reached the upper limit value, the second start memory is not stored even if a game ball newly wins in the second start winning opening 37.

  During the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, a game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started (t243). Accordingly, the number of remaining games becomes two, and the upper limit of the second start memory is changed to two. At this time, b, c, and d are stored as the second start memories, which exceed the upper limit. However, all of them are valid, and b, c, and d are stored as the second start memories. It remains as it is. It should be noted that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result due to a small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game (t245).

  In this case, since there is no invalid second start memory, the effect symbol fluctuates and stops corresponding to the executed special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 variable display game. That is, with the start of the special figure 2 change display game based on the second start memory a, the change of the effect design starts (t242), and the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36, and the special figure 1 change display game starts. Is started, and the variation of the effect symbol is stopped at a stop symbol indicating that it is out of the fluctuation (t243). Thereafter, a new change is started (t244), and with the end of the special figure 2 change display game based on the second start memory a, the change of the effect symbol is stopped at a stop symbol indicating that it is a small hit ( t245). The display of the number-of-games information display section 85 is such that when the variation of the effect symbols is started (t242, t244), the number of remaining games is reduced and the number of executed games is increased.

  Then, the special figure 2 change display game based on the second start memory b is started as the 49th special figure change display game in the specific game state (t246). Accordingly, the number of remaining games becomes 1, and the upper limit of the second start memory is changed to 1. However, since the second start memory that has already been stored is made valid, c and d are stored as the second start memory. Further, the special figure 2 change display game based on the second start memory c is started as the 50th special figure change display game in the specific game state (t247). Accordingly, the number of remaining games becomes zero, and the upper limit of the second start memory is changed to zero. However, since the already stored second start memory is valid, the second start memory is in a state where d is stored.

  Then, the special game state ends with the end of the special figure change display game, and the normal game state is set (t248). In the normal game state, the upper limit value of the second start memory is 0, but since the second start memory d stored during the specific game state is valid, a special map based on the second start memory d is effective. The two-variation display game is started. In this way, by making the second start memory stored in the specific game state valid even if the upper limit is exceeded, all the generated second start memories can be consumed.

  Note that the special figure 2 variable display game executed after the end of the specific game state based on the second start memory stored in the specific game state in this manner is not the variable time selected in the normal game state, The variation time selected during the specific game state or a variation time shorter than that may be set. Further, since the irregular fluctuation does not occur intentionally, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag may not be set.

  From the above, the start storage means (game control device 100) keeps the start storage already stored when the upper limit value is reduced by the upper limit value change means (game control device 100) even after the decrease of the upper limit value. It will be treated as valid. Therefore, all the stored start memories can be consumed.

  Note that the notification of the result of the pre-reading process for the second start memory in the specific game state includes the invalid second start memory and the second start memory executed after the end of the specific game state, as described above. It is preferable that at least the notification of the result of the prefetching process is not performed during a predetermined period before the end of the gaming state. For example, in a period after the number of remaining games in the specific game state matches a value twice as large as the second upper limit number, the result of the prefetching process is not notified.

  Next, control of the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state will be described. As shown in FIG. 105, in a state where the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed, as shown in FIG. Is performed, the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with the special result first as shown in FIG. 105 (c). Will be stopped. In order to avoid such a situation, the effect control device 300, when receiving a command notifying that the special figure 1 variable display game is longer from the game control device 100, performs an effect with a high degree of expectation. I try not to do it.

(Direction lottery process)
FIG. 106 illustrates an effect lottery process performed by the effect control device 300 as a process for determining the fluctuation pattern of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. In this effect lottery process, first, the fluctuation pattern received from the game control device 100 is checked (step Z11), and it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that can execute a premium effect that is a high expectation effect (step Z12). . When the variation pattern is not a variation pattern in which the premier effect can be executed (Step Z12; N), an effect lottery process is performed (Step Z15), and the effect lottery process ends. In the effect lottery process, a variation pattern other than the premium effect is selected according to the variation pattern received from the game control device 100.

  If the variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a premier effect can be executed (step Z12; Y), it is determined whether a command for notifying that the variation time of the special figure 1 is longer is received (step Z13). If a command notifying that the fluctuating time in Tokuzu 1 is longer is received (step Z13; Y), a specific pattern is set (step Z16), and the effect lottery process ends. In this case, since a situation as shown in FIG. 105 may occur, a specific pattern which is not a premiere effect is selected. The specific pattern will be described later.

  If a command notifying that the fluctuating time of the special figure 1 is longer is not received (step Z13; N), a premium effect lottery process is performed (step Z14), and a normal effect lottery process (step Z15). To end the production lottery process. In the premier effect lottery process, the presence / absence of the premier effect (special effect) and the type are selected. When it is determined that the premium effect is to be executed, the type is determined, and the determined premium effect is the variation pattern of the decorative special figure 1 variation display game. In this case, the lottery in the normal effect lottery process is not performed. If it is determined not to execute the premium effect, a variation pattern other than the premium effect is selected in the normal effect lottery process. In the premier effect lottery process, whether to perform the premiere effect lottery or the probability of winning the premier effect in the case of performing the lottery may be varied depending on whether or not the result is a special result.

  FIG. 107 shows an example in which the special pattern is not set because the special figure 1 variable display game ends before the special figure 2 variable display game. When the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed in the normal game state as shown in FIG. 107 (a), the special figure 1 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. 107 (b). In this case, a premium effect can be set, and in this example, a premium effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 107 (c) and 107 (d).

  Here, since the special figure 1 variable display game has a special result (here, a big hit), the special figure 2 variable display game is lost with the end of the special figure 1 variable display game as shown in FIG. Forced stop on result. Note that if the special figure 1 variable display game is to be lost, the special figure 2 variable display game is not forcibly stopped.

  FIG. 108 shows an example in which a specific pattern is set. When the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed in the normal game state as shown in FIG. 108 (a), the special figure 1 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. 108 (b). The special figure 2 variable display game being executed is completed earlier than the special figure 1 variable display game, and has a special result (here, a small hit). Therefore, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of a loss, so that a specific pattern is set.

  This specific pattern is a fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation time of a predetermined time (for example, 12 seconds) in which the reach state does not occur. If the special figure 2 variable display game does not end even after the change time elapses, as shown in FIG. 108 (c), the temporary special figure 1 variable display game is displayed in a tentatively stopped state in which the variable display game fluctuates as a result. Become. If the special figure 2 variable display game is completed before the change time elapses, the identification symbol of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is stopped at that time.

  When the special figure 1 variable display game is terminated with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game, the identification symbol of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is stopped as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the game enters the second special game state, and after the second special game state ends, the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the first start memory as shown in FIG. 108 (e).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the period in which the identification symbol is fluctuated and displayed at high speed in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is set to a time from the stop of the special figure 2 variable display game to a predetermined time before, and is always set. The state shown in FIG. 108 (c) may be passed.

  In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed simultaneously, the specific pattern is set even when the special figure 1 variable display game ends first and the first special result is obtained. You may do it. FIG. 109 shows a display example in this case. 109 (a) to 109 (c) are the same as FIG. 107. Thereafter, with the end of the special figure 1 variable display game, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game stops in the result mode of the first special result and the special figure 2 variable display game ends as shown in FIG. 109 (d). , The first special game state. By enabling such an effect, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to a specific pattern.

  Note that a specific pattern as shown in FIG. 109 is set even in the case where the outlier result can be selected as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game, and also when the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped earlier due to the outlier result. It is possible. If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a loss result, the premium lottery process (step Z14) may be executed even when the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped first.

  In the above-described effect lottery processing for determining the fluctuation pattern of the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed, the premium effect lottery The processing (step Z14) may not be performed. In this case, when the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result in the normal game state, it is longer than the longest variable time set when the special figure 1 variable display game has the first special result in the normal game state. It is preferable that the set shortest fluctuation time is longer. By doing so, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started after the special figure 1 variable display game in which the premiere effect is set, the special figure 1 variable display game stops earlier than the special figure 1 Does not occur.

  It should be noted that there may be other measures to cope with the case where the special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped due to the deviation result based on the special result derived in one special figure variation display game. For example, as described in the special figure 1 change start processing shown in FIG. 44, when the change time of the special figure 1 change display game to be executed is not less than the remaining change time of the special figure 2 change display game (step Y254; N ), A process of resetting the variation pattern may be performed in addition to or instead of the process of preparing a command for notifying that the variation time of the special figure 1 is longer (step Y255). .

  In the process of resetting the variation pattern, if the effect control device 300 changes the variation effect to a variation pattern in which the premium effect cannot be selected, it is not a variation pattern in which the premium effect can be executed in the process of FIG. 106 (step Z12; N). It is determined that the selection of the premiere effect is not performed. Further, in the process of resetting the variation pattern, the variation pattern may be changed so as to select the specific pattern, so that the specific pattern is always selected. In the process of resetting the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time may not be changed or may be changed.

  Also, instead of changing the variation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246), the variable pattern is executed in the future when determining the variation pattern in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246). A process (step Y254) of determining whether the change time of the special figure 1 change display game is less than the remaining change time of the special figure 2 change display game is performed, and a change pattern according to the game situation is determined from the beginning. You may do it.

  In addition, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game can be selected as the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed only when the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. A process (step Y254) of determining whether or not the time is less than the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game is performed. If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, this processing is unnecessary because the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped by the result of the out of order.

  Further, as another example of a countermeasure for a case where the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped with the result of being deviated based on the special result being derived in one special figure variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. In the normal game state in which the variable display game is mainly performed, the special figure 1 variable display game may be treated as superior, and the processing may be advanced so that the special figure 1 variable display game proceeds advantageously.

  When such processing is performed, in the special figure 1 change start processing shown in FIG. 44, when the change time of the special figure 1 change display game to be executed is not less than the remaining change time of the special figure 2 change display game ( In step Y254; N), it is determined whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a special result instead of the processing of steps Y225 and Y226, and if the special result is obtained, the change of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed. A process of changing the time to be less than the remaining change time of the special figure 2 change display game is performed. In this way, it is possible to prevent a special result that should have been derived in the special figure 1 variable display game from being changed to a loss result.

  In addition, even if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is incorrect and the time is less than the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game, if the first start storage number is large, the special figure based on these is used. A short variation time may be set so that the variation display game of FIG. 1 is included before the end of the special figure 2 variation display game.

  The special figure 2 variable display game is not so disadvantageous even if a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game, but the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly performed in the special game state mainly performed by the special figure 2 variable display game. The game may be treated as superior. For example, in the special figure 2 change display processing shown in FIG. 45, if the change time of the special figure 2 change display game determined in the high probability state is not less than the remaining change time of the special figure 1 change display game, It is determined whether the 1st variable display game has a special result and the result of the special figure 2 variable display game has the first special result. If the special figure 2 variable display game has the first special result, the special figure 2 variable A process of changing the change time of the display game to be less than the remaining change time of the special figure 1 change display game may be performed.

  By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first special result that should have been derived in the special figure 2 variable display game from being changed to a loss result. In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game has the first special result, the variable time is adjusted so that the more advantageous one is derived as compared with the first special result of the special figure 2 variable display game. You may do it.

  From the above, the first determining means (game control device 100) determines the second mode when determining the variation mode information of the first variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game) in the normal state (normal game state). The change mode of the first variable display game may be determined with reference to whether or not the change display game (the special figure 2 variable display game) is running and / or the change mode information of the second variable display game. It will be possible.

  Further, the variation mode information of the first variable display game or the second variable display game includes information on a variable time capable of specifying the execution time of the variable display game, and the first determination unit determines that the normal state (normal game) When determining the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in (state), if the second variation display game is being executed, the variation included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game It is possible to determine the variation mode information of the first variation display game by referring to the time.

  The change mode information of the first variable display game or the second variable display game includes information on a variable time that can specify the execution time of the variable display game and information on a change pattern corresponding to the variable time. The first determining means includes, without reference to the change mode information of the second variable display game, when determining the change mode information including the change time of the first variable display game in the normal state (normal game state). A first variation mode determination means (game control device 100) capable of determining variation mode information of the first variation display game, and a variation time of the first variation display game by the first variation mode determination means. If the second variation display game is being executed when the variation mode information is determined, the determination is made with reference to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game. And has a second variation mode determining means it is possible to re-determine information about variation pattern without changing the fluctuation time of the first variable display games (gaming controller 100), and further comprising a.

  In addition, the second variation mode determination means does not redetermine information on the variation pattern when the result of the second variation display game being executed does not become a special result.

  When the state of the second variable display game at the start of the first variable display game satisfies a predetermined condition, the decoration variable display game execution control means (effect control device 300) responds to the first variable display game. It is possible to execute a special effect lottery for determining whether or not to perform a special effect in the decoration variation display game executed.

  In addition, the decoration variation display game execution control means executes the first variation display game when the second variation display game is being executed at the start of the first variation display game and the result of the second variation display game is not correct. It is possible to execute a special effect lottery for determining whether or not to perform a special effect in the decoration variable display game executed in response to the variable display game.

  In the second starting winning opening 37, a normal variable winning device capable of converting a state into a closed state where a game ball is difficult to win or cannot win and an open state where the game ball can win or win more than the closed state. May be provided. Then, in the specific game state in which the game progresses mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game, the opening time of the normal variable winning device per unit time may be controlled to be substantially longer than in the normal game state. .

  Although only the upper limit of the second start memory is changed, the upper limit of the first start memory may be changed. Further, a general-purpose starting display memory is generated based on a game ball passing through a specific area provided in the game area 32, and a general-purpose changing display game is executed based on the general-purpose starting memory to execute the general-purpose changing display game. If the normal variable winning device is set to the open state when the result of (1) is a specific result, the upper limit value of the normal figure starting memory may be changed.

  Also, the upper limit value may be changed at the start of the first special game state or during the first special game state. Further, the upper limit value may be changed regardless of the jackpot, for example, the upper limit value may be increased or decreased over a predetermined period based on winning in a lottery for increasing or decreasing the upper limit value. . Also, the upper limit may be increased or decreased over a predetermined period based on the result of the progress of the game, such as the number of occurrences of the reach or the number of executions of the special figure change display game, satisfying a predetermined condition.

  Although the gaming machine is configured to execute the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game at the same time, the game machine which does not simultaneously execute the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is similarly started and stored. May be changed. In this case, one of the special figure change display games may be preferentially executed, or the special figure change display game may be executed in the order in which the start memories are generated. Also, in a gaming machine that executes only one type of special figure fluctuation display game, the upper limit of the start memory may be similarly changed.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. The gaming machine of the present modification is different in the display mode of the number-of-games information display section 85 and the effect symbols.

  As described above, if the progress of the game is displayed only in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, and the game number information display unit 85, the conventional special figure variable display game is not executed simultaneously. There is a possibility that a player who is accustomed to the gaming machine may have difficulty understanding the progress of the game. For this reason, in the present modification, clear information is not displayed on the game number information display unit 85 at least during a period in which the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory is executed from the end of the special game state. I have to.

  FIG. 110 shows the execution of the special figure change display game and a change in the display of the game number information display section 85. FIGS. 111 and 112 show the display on the display device 41. In the ending period (t61) of the first special game state shown in FIG. 110, a notification that the specific game state is started is issued as shown in FIG. 111 (a). In this example, at the end of the first special game state, there are three first start memories, and as shown in FIG. 110, a special figure based on the first first start memory with the end of the first special game state. The one-variation display game is started (t62). In addition, the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation display of the effect design are also started.

  Further, during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, a game ball has won the second start winning opening 37, and the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t63). In addition, the variable display of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is also started. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed. The effect symbol for which the variable display is started with the start of the special figure 1 variable display game is changed while the variable display is continued as shown in FIG. 111 (b) even when the special figure 2 variable display game is started. Do not.

  As shown in FIG. 110, the special figure 2 variable display game ends before the special figure 1 variable display game, and a second special result (small hit) is obtained. Therefore, with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the disconnection (t64). At this time, as shown in FIG. 111 (c), the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game stop in the result mode corresponding to the result of each game, and the effect symbol is the second special result. Stop in the result mode corresponding to.

  In the game up to this point, the special figure variable display game is executed twice, but the effect symbol starts at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game and stops at the stop of the special figure 2 variable display game. Therefore, to the player, it looks as if the one special figure change display game that is the second special result has been performed. By doing so, it is possible to easily convey the progress and contents of the game to a player who is used to a conventional gaming machine that does not execute the special figure change display game at the same time.

  The display on the number-of-games information display section 58 is started with the end of the first special game state (t62). Here, “Under preparation” is displayed to clearly display the number of remaining games and the number of executions. The display shows the preparation mode not to be performed. During a period in which there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed, displaying the information on the actual number of games will make the change complicated, and the player will not be able to understand or distrust. Here, the information on the number of games is not clearly displayed because there is a fear that the player may feel a feeling. The preparation mode display is continued until at least the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start storage stored at the end of the first special game state is completed. In this case, the first start storage is performed. (T67) until the special game state ends in a state where does not exist.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110, after the second special game state ends, the special figure 1 variable display game based on the second first start memory is started (t65). As in the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first first start memory, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the off result as the special figure 2 variable display game has the second special result. The second special game state is entered (t65 to t66). The same applies to the third first start memory (t66 to t67).

  The contents of the display on the display device 41 during the period from t65 to t66 or t66 to t67 are the same as the display at t62 to 65 as shown in, for example, FIGS. In the information display section 85, "Under preparation" is displayed, and the effect design starts at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game and stops in a result mode corresponding to the second special result based on the stop of the special figure 2 variable display game. I do.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 110, when the special game state ends in a state where the first start memory does not exist (t67), thereafter, a state is mainly executed in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. Since this is the same as a conventional gaming machine that does not simultaneously execute the special figure change display game, the RUSH display mode in which the game number information display unit 85 displays information on the number of games is performed.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), "RUSH start" indicating that the RUSH display mode has been entered is displayed, and the remaining game number is displayed on the game number information display section 85. However, the number of remaining games that is smaller than the actual number of remaining games is displayed. Here, although the actual number of remaining games is 43, it is displayed as 40.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 110, the number of remaining games in the number-of-games information display section 85 is subtracted every time the special figure variation display game is executed (FIG. 112 (c)). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (d), a display for instructing to operate the effect button 25 at a predetermined timing is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 25 in accordance with the instruction, as shown in FIG. 112 (e), an effect is produced in which the dragon emits a flame on the game number information display section 85 as an effect display, as shown in FIG. 112 (f). An additional effect is performed in which the value of the game number information display section 85 is added so as to become the actual remaining game number.

  The actual remaining game number may be displayed at the start of the RUSH display mode (t67). Further, the actual remaining number of games is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 25. However, based on the operation of the effect button 25, a predetermined value such that the value of the game number information display section 85 becomes less than the actual remaining number of games. A value may be added.

  In the display on the game number information display section 85 at the start of the RUSH mode, the number of games to be reduced from the actual remaining number of games is preferably equal to or more than the upper limit of the first start memory (here, 4). . When the second start memory can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4) for the special figure 2 variable display game, a value obtained by summing the upper limit of the first start memory and the upper limit of the second start memory (for example, 8) More preferably.

  Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed in the RUSH display mode, the effect design is changed to a single variable display similarly to t62 to t65, and the game number information display section is displayed. The subtraction of the number of remaining games at 85 may be set to 1 to make it easier for the player to understand. By making the number of remaining games displayed at the start of the RUSH display mode smaller than the actual number of remaining games, it is possible to reduce the number of remaining games to one in such a case. However, if the number of remaining games currently displayed and the actual number of remaining games match, the subtraction of the number of remaining games is set to 2, or the RUSH display mode is switched to the RUSH display mode after a predetermined period of time as the preparation mode display again. Preferably, the transition is made so that no inconsistency occurs.

  From the above, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is a game number information notifying means (effect control device 300) capable of notifying the game number information which is information according to the subtraction result by the subtraction means (effect control device 300). The number-of-games information notifying means notifies the number-of-games information at least until the first variable display game based on the first start memory stored at the end of the first special game state ends. It will not be.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing are performed at different interrupt timings.

  In the gaming machine of this modification, a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 113 is performed instead of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this timer interrupt processing, the special winning opening switch monitoring processing performed in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing is performed in the main routine of the timer interrupt processing (step X801).

  In the branching process by the special figure processing counter (step X802), if the value of the special figure processing counter is even, the special figure 1 game processing is performed (step X110), and if the value of the special figure processing counter is odd, the special figure 2 game processing (step X111) )I do. Note that 0 is treated as an even number. Thereafter, the special figure processing counter is updated by +1 (step X803).

  The special figure processing counter may be updated sequentially in the range of 0 to 255, may be updated alternately with 0 and 1, and may be any one that updates in the range of an even number of values. In addition, since the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing are alternately performed for each timer interrupt, these processings are performed every time (here, 8 ms) twice as long as the timer interrupt processing time (here, 4 ms). Will be performed. Therefore, the setting of the timer value updated by these processes is performed in consideration of this.

  FIGS. 114 and 115 show the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing in this modification. In these processes, the processes in steps Y101, Y102, Y131, and Y132 performed in the processes in FIGS. 37 and 38 are not performed.

  FIG. 116 shows a special winning opening switch monitoring process in this modification. This special winning opening switch monitoring process is the same as the process shown in FIG. 39 except that a process of determining the special figure hit state (step Y1501) is performed. In the process of determining the hit state of the special figure (step Y1501), it is determined whether the processing is a special result derived in the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, and according to the determination result, Set the target special map. If it is not necessary to distinguish which special figure is to be processed, the process of determining the hit state of the special figure (step Y1501) may not be performed.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the interrupt routine started at a predetermined cycle, and the first variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game) is executed by the first variable display game control means (game control device 100). The second variable display game control means (game control device 100) can execute the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) even when the Even when the variable display game is being executed, the first variable display game control means can execute the first variable display game, and the first variable display game control means controls a series of executions related to the first variable display game. And a series of execution control on the second variable display game by the second variable display game control means so as not to be simultaneously executed in one interrupt routine. And thus it was. As a result, the processing time can be reduced even when simultaneous fluctuations are performed.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, the processing contents in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing shown in FIGS. 27 to 29 are different, and instead of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number, the second start winning opening 37 in the normal gaming state. The same determination as the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is performed based on the special figure 2 abnormal winning number counted based on the winning of the special figure 2.

  FIG. 117 shows an example of counting the special figure 2 abnormal winning number. The special figure 2 abnormal winning number is updated by +1 based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 37 in the normal gaming state (t101, t102). Then, when the special figure 2 abnormal winning number reaches the specified value 5, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved, and based on this flag, external information indicating that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred and the gaming machine error The output of the status signal to the device outside the gaming machine is started, and the occurrence of the abnormal change in the special figure 2 can be grasped by the management device of the game store or the like. In addition, a special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence command is transmitted to effect controller 300. Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 notifies the fact that the abnormal change of the special figure 2 has occurred by display or sound.

  In addition, when the special figure 2 abnormal winning number reaches 5, which is the specified value, the timer of the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer is started (t102), and a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses ( t103), the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is cleared to 0, and the output of the external information and the gaming machine error state signal is stopped. Further, the special figure 2 abnormal change cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 ends the notification that the special figure 2 abnormal change has occurred. If a new prize occurs in the second start winning port 37 before the lapse of the predetermined time, the clocking of the predetermined time is newly started from that time.

  FIG. 118 and FIG. 119 show examples of counting the number of abnormal winnings in the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. 118, validity and invalidity of the monitoring state are set. If the monitoring state is valid and a prize is given to the second starting winning opening 37, the special figure 2 abnormal prize is won. The number is updated by +1 (t113, t116).

  This monitoring state is basically effective when the state is a low probability state. However, if a winning in the second starting winning opening 37 is made in a state where the monitoring state is valid (t113, t116), a predetermined invalid setting period (here, 10 seconds) from the winning is invalidated (t113). -T115, t116-t117), and the winning (t114) to the second starting winning opening 37 generated during the invalid setting period (t113-t115) is not counted as the abnormal winning number. Further, it is invalidated during the first special game state. The second special game state in the low probability state is valid because it is a short period.

  If the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is not newly added from the end of the invalid setting period to a predetermined clearing period (t117 to t118, here, 1800 seconds), It is to be cleared. It is also cleared when the first special game state is started.

  FIG. 119 shows the counting of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number at the end of the specific game state. In the case of the high probability state, the monitoring state is invalid, and therefore, even if there is a winning in the second starting winning opening 37, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is not added. Then, for the last special figure change display game in the high probability state, the probability state is changed to the low probability state at the start of the special figure change display game (t123). Until the end (t124), the state remains invalid.

  Here, since the last special figure change display game started in the high probability state is in the valid state from the end, if the result of the special figure change display game is the second special result, the second special game The state becomes valid from the start of the state (t124). In the second special game state, the player makes a right-handed continuation to the specific game state, so that a prize is generated in the second start winning port 37, and the special figure 2 abnormal prize number is added (t125). However, the second special game state ends in a short time, and the invalid setting period is set from the addition of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number (t125 to t127). In the subsequent winning in the second starting winning opening 37, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is not added (t126). Therefore, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number added according to the second special game state remains at 1 and is cleared after the clear period (t127 to t128) elapses, so that there is no problem.

  In order to enable such a process, in the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process of FIG. 27, a prize is given to the second start winning opening 37 in a state where the monitoring state is valid instead of the processes of steps X381 to X389. Is performed to update the special figure 2 abnormal winning number by +1 based on. In the processing of steps X390 to X403, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is used instead of the special figure 2 abnormal change number.

  It should be noted that the specified value of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number for performing the special figure 2 abnormal change notification and the length of the clearing period can be arbitrarily set. The specified value or the length of the period set here may be any value as long as it can prevent the player from aiming at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state. When a power failure occurs and recovery is performed, monitoring is restarted from the state before the power failure occurred. Even when the special figure 2 abnormal change notification is performed, the payout of the prize ball for the winning is performed as usual.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed, the other special figure The figure variation display game is interrupted, and the suspended special figure variation display game is resumed after the end of the special game state.

  FIG. 120 shows the collective display device 50 in the gaming machine of the present modification. D1 to D18 are the same as those in FIG. D19 and D20 are interruption display sections 79 indicating whether or not the special figure change display game is interrupted. As shown in FIG. 120 (b), the interruption display unit 79 is in a state where neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, and the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. State, special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted.

  FIG. 121 shows an example in which the special figure change display game is interrupted, and FIGS. 122 and 123 show the display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50. In this example, first, as shown in FIG. 121, in a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the variable display game b which is the special figure 2 variable display game starts. After that (t151), the variable display game a, which is the special figure 1 variable display game, is started (t152).

  Thus, as shown in FIG. 122 (a), a state is displayed in which the variable display is performed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. In addition, all of the interruption display sections 79 are turned off. Further, the display device 41 performs a variable display of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 121, in the variable display game a, the first special result is derived as a result before the variable display game b, and the processing is completed (t153), and after the predetermined stop time elapses, the first special game state is reached. (T154). Based on the derivation of the first special result, the variable display game b is suspended (t153). During the suspension, the measurement of the variation time is suspended and the variation display is continued. Further, during suspension, a display indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended is displayed on the suspension display section 79.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (b), in a state where the variable display game a derives the first special result and stops, the special result mode corresponding to the first special result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. It becomes. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 keeps performing the variable display. Further, in the interruption display section 79, D20 is lit to indicate that the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted. In the display device 41, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game stops in the special result mode corresponding to the first special result, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game continues to perform the variable display. Also, as shown in FIG. 122 (c) and FIG. 123 (a), even during the special game state, the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the interruption display unit 79 operate as shown in FIG. 122 (b). The display mode is the same as when the result is derived.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121, when the first special game state ends, the suspended variable display game b is resumed, and the measurement of the variable time is resumed (t155). Then, the variable display game b ends based on the lapse of the remaining variable time (t157). After the end of the first special game state, the variable display game c is newly started in the special figure 1 variable display game. The variable display game c is stopped before the variable display game b (t156), but since the result is incorrect, the variable display game b continues without interruption.

  As shown in FIGS. 122 (b) and (c), with the end of the special game state, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 perform variable display. Further, in the interruption display section 79, all the lights are turned off to indicate that the interruption has not been interrupted due to the restart of the special figure 2 variable display game.

  In this way, the special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted based on the special result derived in one special figure fluctuation display game, and the interrupted special figure fluctuation display game is resumed after the end of the special game state. Thus, it is possible to derive the result as determined by the lottery performed at the start of each special figure change display game. During the suspension of the special figure change display game, an interruption signal may be output as external information, and information for determining which of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is being suspended is output together. May be.

  In order to perform the process related to the interruption of the special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation processing shown in FIG. 124 is performed instead of the special figure 1 fluctuation processing shown in FIG. In the special figure 1 changing process, if the special figure 2 is also being executed (step Y630; Y), the processing of stopping the special figure 2 variable display game in steps Y631 to Y639 is not performed, and the special figure 2 interruption flag Is performed (step Y1511).

  Also, the special figure 2 changing process shown in FIG. 125 is performed instead of the special figure 2 changing process shown in FIG. In the special figure 2 changing process, when the special figure 1 is also being executed (step Y660; Y), the special figure 1 interrupting flag is not executed without executing the special figure 1 changing display game stop processing of steps Y661 to Y669. Is performed (step Y1512).

  Also, the special figure 1 game processing shown in FIG. 126 is performed instead of the special figure 1 game processing shown in FIG. In this special figure 1 game process, it is determined whether there is a special figure 1 suspended flag (step Y1513), and if there is no special figure 1 suspended flag (step Y1513; N), If the interruption has not been performed, the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game after step Y103 is performed. On the other hand, if there is a special figure 1 interrupted flag (step Y1513; Y), that is, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y103 to Y118 is not performed. Then, the process proceeds to Step Y119. As a result, during the suspension of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display is continued.

  Also, the special figure 2 game processing shown in FIG. 127 is performed instead of the special figure 2 game processing shown in FIG. In this special figure 2 game process, it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 suspended flag (step Y1514), and if there is no special figure 2 suspended flag (step Y1514; N), If the interruption has not been performed, the processing relating to the special figure 2 variable display game after step Y133 is performed. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 suspended flag is present (step Y1514; Y), that is, when the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended, the processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game in steps Y133 to Y149 is not performed. Then, the process proceeds to Step Y152. As a result, during the suspension of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display is continued.

  Also, the special figure 1 big hit end processing shown in FIG. 128 is performed in place of the special figure 1 big hit end processing shown in FIG. In the special figure 1 big hit end processing, processing for clearing the special figure 2 suspended flag (step Y1515) is performed. As a result, the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted after the end of the first special game state is restarted.

  Also, the special figure 2 big hit end processing shown in FIG. 129 is performed instead of the special figure 2 big hit end processing shown in FIG. In this special figure 2 big hit end processing, processing for clearing the special figure 1 interrupted flag (step Y1517) is performed. As a result, the special figure 1 variable display game that has been interrupted after the end of the first special game state is restarted.

  In addition, the special figure 1 small hit end processing shown in FIG. 130 is performed instead of the special figure 1 small hit end processing shown in FIG. In the special figure 1 small hit end processing, a processing of clearing the special figure 2 suspended flag (step Y1518) is performed. As a result, the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted after the end of the second special game state is restarted.

  In addition, the special figure 2 small hit end processing shown in FIG. 131 is performed instead of the special figure 2 small hit end processing shown in FIG. In the special figure 2 small hit ending processing, processing for clearing the special figure 1 suspended flag (step Y1519) is performed. As a result, the special figure 1 variable display game that has been interrupted after the end of the second special game state is restarted.

  In the special game state performed during the suspension of the special figure 1 variable display game, a notice effect about the result or the change pattern of the suspended special figure 1 variable display game may be performed. Further, when there is the first start memory, the prefetch effect for the first start memory may be performed during the special game state.

  FIG. 132 shows an example of a pattern that uses a different control method depending on the situation as to how to control the other special figure variable display game based on a special result derived from one special figure variable display game. showed that. Here, the control method 1 is a control method for forcibly stopping the other special figure variable display game based on a special result derived from the one special figure variable display game based on a result of departure. Further, the control method 2 is a control method in which the special figure variable display game is interrupted based on the special result derived in one special figure variable display game and restarted after the special game state ends.

  Pattern 1 shown in FIG. 132 (a) is a pattern for setting a control method according to the special figure type. In this pattern, if a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the result of the loss (control method 1). On the other hand, when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted and restarted after the special game state ends (control method 2). ).

  In particular, when a big hit is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the disconnection (control method 1), so that the game is started when the high probability state is started. The game can be made to proceed advantageously for the player. That is, if the control method 2 is used in this case, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the fluctuation time started in the low probability state is long at the start of the high probability state is restarted. The game will be difficult to start. In the high-probability state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is shortened, and a special result is frequently generated so that the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls. As a result, the start of the new special figure 2 variable display game is hastened, and the game advantageously proceeds for the player.

  Pattern 2 shown in FIG. 132 (b) is a pattern for setting a control method based on a special result. In this pattern, for example, when the first special result (big hit) is derived in one special figure change display game, the other special figure change display game is forcibly stopped with the result of the loss (control method 1). . On the other hand, if the second special result (small hit) is derived in one special figure change display game, the other special figure change display game is interrupted and restarted after the special game state ends (control Method 2). Note that the control method may be selected in consideration of the special figure type.

  Pattern 3 shown in FIG. 132 (c) is a pattern for setting a control method depending on the type of hit. For example, when the big hit symbol 1A or the small hit symbol 1a is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a result of a loss (control method 1). On the other hand, if the big hit symbol 1B or the small hit symbol 1b is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted and restarted after the special game state ends (control method 2). ). It should be noted that the control method may be set simply based on which of the first special result and the second special result.

  A pattern 4 shown in FIG. 132 (d) is a pattern for setting a control method according to a game state and a special figure type. When a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the result of the loss (control method 1). On the other hand, when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted and restarted after the special game state ends (control method 2). In the specific game state (during ST), the control method 2 is used regardless of the type of the special figure or the type of the special result.

  In this example, in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the disconnection so as to be disadvantageous to the player, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game. Like that. In addition, in the special figure 1 variable display game that is the main player in the normal game state, the special result is prevented from being changed to a loss due to the forced stop. In addition, since the specific game state is an advantageous state for the player, the special result is prevented from being changed to a wrong result due to the forcible stop in any of the special figure fluctuation display games, so that the player can maximize the profit. To be able to obtain. In addition, in consideration of the profit balance with the game store, the special figure 1 variable display game which is not the main player in the specific game state is forcibly stopped to prevent the player from getting excessive profit. Is also good. Further, the control method may be set only based on the game state. For example, only the control method 1 may be set in the normal game state, and only the control method 2 may be set in the specific game state.

  Pattern 5 shown in FIG. 132 (e) is a pattern for setting a control method according to a game state, a special figure type, and a special result type. In the normal gaming state, the second special result is derived in one special figure variable display game, so that the special result of the other special figure variable display game is not changed to a loss result. Further, in the specific game state, the first special result is derived in one special figure variable display game, so that the special result of the other special figure variable display game is not changed to the off result. Try to increase the value of special results.

  Note that the pattern of the control method is not limited to those described above, and may be other patterns. In addition, the type of the special figure, the type of the special result, the game state, and the like have been described as the parameters for selecting the control method. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other parameters may be considered. Other parameters include the number of games since the end of the special game state, calendar information such as date, day of the week, current time, and the like, achievement of some condition in the game such as generating a predetermined number of missed reach, and the like.

  When the control method is selected as shown in FIG. 132, when the special figure 2 is also being executed (step Y630; Y) in the special figure 1 changing process shown in FIG. A process for selecting either interruption or termination is performed. When the interruption is selected, a process of saving the suspension flag of the special figure 2 is performed (step Y1511), and the processes after step Y640 are performed. If the end is selected, the processing of stopping the special figure 2 variable display game in steps Y631 to Y639 shown in FIG. 62 is performed, and the processing of step Y640 and thereafter is performed.

  Further, in the special figure 2 changing process shown in FIG. 125, when the special figure 1 is also being executed (step Y660; Y), a process of selecting either interruption or termination according to the condition is performed. To When the interruption is selected, the process of saving the suspension flag of the special figure 1 is performed (step Y1512), and the processes after step Y670 are performed. If the end is selected, the processing of stopping the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y661 to Y669 shown in FIG. 63 is performed, and the processing of step Y670 and thereafter is performed.

  That is, the game control device 100 terminates one variable display game as a result other than the special result, and terminates one variable display game and terminates the special game state based on the other variable display game. And a resuming control for resuming one of the interrupted variable display games based on a predetermined condition.

  From the above, one of the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) and the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) is controlled by one of the variable display game execution control means. If the execution control of the display game (special figure change display game) is being performed and the other change display game whose execution control is being performed by the other change display game execution control means has a special result, End control to end the variable display game as a result other than the special result, and one variable display game interrupted after the one variable display game is interrupted and the special game state based on the other variable display game ends. And a selecting means (game control device 100) for selecting and executing one of the following based on predetermined conditions.

  The selection means is controlled by the second variable display game execution control means when the first variable display game execution control means controls the execution of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). Is performed, the first variable display game is interrupted and the special game state based on the second variable display game ends when the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) having a special result is completed. When the second variable display game execution control means controls the execution of the second variable display game, the first variable display game is selected and executed. When the first variable display game for which execution control is performed by the game execution control means has a special result, the second variable display game is selected and executed to end as a result other than the special result. The it has to so that.

  When the other variable display game has the first special result, the selecting means selects and executes end control for terminating the one variable display game as a result other than the special result, and executes the other variable display game. Is the second special result, restart control for interrupting one variable display game and resuming one variable display game that has been interrupted after the special game state based on the other variable display game ends Is selected and executed.

  Further, when the second variable display game execution control means controls the execution of the second variable display game when the specific game state is set, the selection means controls the execution by the first variable display game execution control means. If the first variable display game in which the first variable display game is executed has a special result, the second variable display game is interrupted and the second variable display game interrupted after the special game state based on the first variable display game ends. This means that the restart control for restarting the display game is selected and executed.

  Further, the variation mode information of the first variable display game and the second variable display game includes information on a variable time capable of specifying an execution time of the variable display game, and the first variable display game and the second variable display game. Measurement means (measurement control device 100) that starts measuring the fluctuation time in response to the start of the fluctuation display game, and ends the measurement of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display game when the measurement time has elapsed. ), The first variable display game execution control means and the second variable display game execution control means end the variable display of the variable display game being executed in response to the measurement means ending the measurement of the variable time. When the restart control is selected by the selecting means, the measuring means determines that one of the variable display games is based on a special result of the other variable display game. Of interrupting the measurement of the variation time, so that the special game state based on the other of the variable display games so as to resume the measurement of the variation time of one variation display game that was interrupted at the end of completion.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, the display method and configuration of the collective display device 50 are different.

  FIG. 133 shows a display method of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 at the start of the change. As shown in FIG. 133 (a), when starting the variation display of the next special figure variation display game from the state in which the previous special figure variation display game is lost or the special result result mode is displayed, all lights are turned off. Start from the state of. By doing so, it becomes immediately apparent that the fluctuation has started. It should be noted that, during the fluctuation, the symbols are turned off and the symbols are repeated repeatedly. However, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the lights may be turned off and the symbols not used as the result mode may be repeated. In any case, it can be immediately recognized that the fluctuation has started. Further, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may differ in a design that is lost, a design that is first lit at the start of the change, a design that is displayed during the change display, and the like.

  FIG. 134 shows another example of the configuration of the batch display device 50. As shown in FIG. 134 (a), in the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are each configured by a plurality of LEDs arranged in a straight line. In addition, the LEDs q to t functioning as the storage display unit 54 for informing the number of start storage of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the LEDu having the functions of the round display unit 60, the first game state display unit 77, and the probability display unit 78. To x are provided. Note that other functions may be assigned.

  As shown in FIG. 134 (b), in the special figure 1 display 51, the off symbol is formed by turning on the LEDs a and b, and during the variable display, the off symbol and all off are repeated. Further, as shown in FIG. 134 (c), in the special figure 2 display 52, the off symbol is constituted by turning on only the LEDi, and during the variable display, the off symbol and all off are repeated. As described above, the lost symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is different from that of the special figure 2 variable display game.

  Further, as the display mode during the variable display of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 configured as described above, a display mode other than the above-mentioned display mode may be used. It is also possible to turn on and off adjacent LEDs sequentially so that light flows along the direction from the LED at one end to the LED at the other end. Further, as shown in FIG. 135, the number of LEDs may be different between the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. In this case, any of the special figure displays may be controlled so that the time during which light flows from the LED at one end to the LED at the other end is the same. That is, the special figure 2 display 52 having a larger number of LEDs than the special figure 1 display 51 may have a higher light flowing speed. Of course, the speed at which light flows may be the same. In addition, a missing symbol or a changing symbol may be changed.

  When the number of LEDs is different between the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, more result modes can be set for the special figure with the larger number. That is, when there are a plurality of patterns of small hits due to different opening modes as in the present embodiment, a right-handed shot is performed to the extent that it is not determined to be illegal in a normal state, and a game ball is awarded to the special figure 2 starting winning opening 37, It is highly likely that an illegal act of aiming at the first special variable winning device 38 is performed when the result mode corresponding to the long opening is observed by looking at the LED of the special figure 2 display 52 after the predetermined variable time has elapsed. On the other hand, for example, if the number of LEDs of the special figure 2 display 52 is increased, more small hit result modes can be set, and the player can easily recognize the long open result mode. And the above-mentioned misconduct can be prevented.

  FIG. 136 shows another example of the configuration of the collective display device 50. The collective display device 50 includes LEDs a to y and z1 to z4. Then, a covering member 95 made of a seal or a plate material is attached to the front surface so as to cover the front surface of the batch display device 50. In the covering member 95, the portions of the LEDs a to y that are used during the game are transparent, so that it can be seen at a glance that the LEDs are present. Note that it is sufficient that the presence of the LED can be understood at a glance, and it may be translucent in addition to being transparent, or may be hollowed out.

  In addition, on the covering member 95, a display indicating the function of the LED is provided adjacent to a necessary portion of the portion where the presence of the LED is apparent at a glance. For example, the LEDu forming the round display unit 60 is provided. The number of rounds to be notified when each is turned on is displayed at a position adjacent to .about.x.

  The LEDs z1 to z4 that are not used during the game are hidden by the covering member 95 so that it is not apparent at a glance that the LEDs are present. The LEDs z1 to z4 may not be used at all as functions of the gaming machine. However, if there is an inconvenience due to the presence of an unused LED, for example, it is used as an LED for notifying the initialization of the RAM, and the portion of the covering member 95 covering the LEDs z1 to z4 is apparently turned off when the LED is turned off. And the lighting state is translucent so that it can be confirmed.

  By using such a collective display device 50 and the covering member 95, the function of each LED and the configuration of the covering member 95 are set according to the model, so that the collective display device 50 is shared even for different models. Can be used.

  FIG. 137 shows another example of the configuration of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in the collective display device 50. As shown in FIG. 137 (a), the arrangement of the LEDs of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is different.

  In the case of such a configuration, even if the number of the LED to be turned on for the result mode or the symbol being changed is common to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it is displayed on the display with a symbol of a different shape. can do. For example, FIG. 137 (a) shows a state in which a symbol is displayed on both the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. In this out-of-the-box design, the LEDs 2 and 5 are turned on in any of the special figure displays. However, since the arrangement of the LEDs is different, the design has a different shape on the display. As a result, even when the common figure data is used for the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it is possible to make the pattern of a different shape on the display, and various patterns are expressed using the common data. be able to.

  FIG. 137 (b) shows a display on the special figure 1 display unit 51 during a change. In the display during the change, all the lights are turned off and the lighting of the predetermined LED is repeated. Here, before the occurrence of the reach (during the first half fluctuation), the all-off and the lighting of the LEDs 6 and 7 are repeated, and during the N-reach, the all-off and the lighting of the LEDs 2 and 5 are repeated. Further, during SP1 reach, all lights are turned off and the LEDs 1 and 3 are repeatedly turned on, and during SP2 reach, all lights are turned off and the LEDs 4 and 8 are turned on. By making the lighting location different depending on the variation pattern, various effects can be performed.

  Note that, for example, in the case of SP1 reach, a display mode in which all the lights are turned off and the LEDs 1 and 3 are repeatedly turned on from before the occurrence of the reach may be made, and the occurrence of the reach may be announced on the special figure display. Further, as a lighting mode during the change, a lighting mode for suggesting or notifying the occurrence of the big hit may be provided, and the occurrence of the big hit may be indicated or notified on the special figure display.

  FIG. 138 shows another example of the configuration of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in the collective display device 50. As shown in FIG. 138 (a), the special figure 1 display 51 is configured by LEDs arranged in a ring shape, and the light is circulated during the fluctuation display. The display of the result mode is performed by turning on one or a plurality of LEDs. Of course, the special figure 2 display 52 has the same configuration. In addition, the special figure display may form some design, for example, a mushroom shape in the example shown in FIG. 138 (b).

[Sixth Modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, the content of the game is different.

  As shown in FIG. 139, in this modification, there are four game states of a low-probability mode M1, a high-probability mode M2, a high-probability mode M3, and a low-probability mode M4. These game states are changed. Here, low probability in the name of each game state means a low probability state, and high probability means a high probability state. The disadvantage is a special figure 2 variable display game in which a long fluctuation (about 10 minutes) in which the fluctuation time is very long is set in the special figure 2 variable display game. Means a state in which the game is mainly played. Further, the advantage means a state in which the long game is not set in the special figure 2 variable display game, and the game progresses mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game which has a high probability of a small hit and is advantageous to the player. .

  The low-probability mode M1 is a game state corresponding to a normal game state, and the high-probability mode M3 is a game state corresponding to a specific game state. The highly probable mode M2 is a so-called hiding state, in which the player cannot clearly determine whether the mode is the low probable mode M1 or the highly probable mode M2. This effect state is also set when a 2R normal or small hit is won in the low-probability mode M1. The low-probability mode M4 is similar to the time-saving state of a conventional gaming machine. In this game state, the game progresses mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game, so that the next big hit can be waited without reducing the holding ball due to the high frequency of small hits.

  Further, the hit types in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 are as shown in FIG. 139, respectively. Of these, the probable big hit is a big hit that becomes a high probability state until the special figure change display game is executed 50 times after the special game state ends, and a normal big hit becomes a low probability state after the end of the special game state. It is.

  Note that the number of balls can be increased in the low-probability mode M4 by adjusting the number of prize balls obtained in small hits and the fluctuation time. Since the low-probability mode M4 is continued until the next big hit, it can be continued for a long period of time, during which the number of balls can be gradually increased, and a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short time in the special game state. It can be a game different from the game. Furthermore, when the player hits right, the player can win both the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, and the special figure 1 variable display game, which usually has a big hit in the low-probability mode M4, is started. In this case, a special result may be generated in the special figure 2 variable display game to prevent a normal big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game, and a notification may be given to prompt the user to maintain the low-probability mode M4.

  In the gaming machine having a plurality of game states, the effect control device 300 sets the effect according to the game state. However, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 without the backup function loses the information on the game state, so that an appropriate effect cannot be performed. In order to minimize the inconvenience caused by such a situation, the game control device 100 transmits information on the game state to the effect control device 300 at a predetermined timing.

  The game control device 100 sends the probability information command shown in FIG. 140 (a) including the game state information to the effect control device 300 when the game state is switched, at the start of the special game state and at the start of the special figure change display game. Send. As shown in FIG. 140 (b), at the start (t171) of the special figure change display game in a case where the gaming state is a low probability disadvantage, a command of A801h which is a probability information command indicating a low probability disadvantage is shown. Is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Also, at the start of the special game state (t172) that occurs when the user is in the low-probability disadvantage, a command of A801h, which is a probability information command indicating the low-probability disadvantage, is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  Here, since the result is a probable big hit, the game state shifts to the high-precision and advantageous state by the end of the special game state. Along with this, a command of A802h, which is a probability information command indicating high-precision advantage, is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t173). In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of this command, an effect with high accuracy and advantage is performed.

  Then, at the start (t174, t175) of the special figure fluctuation display game when the gaming state is highly probable, a command of A802h, which is a probability information command indicating that the game is highly probable, is sent to the effect control device 300. Send. Thereafter, the power of the effect control device 300 is shut off for some reason (t176), and the display on the display device 41 is not performed (black display). During this time, the game is progressing in the game control device 100, but the display special variable display game or the like on the display device 41 is not performed.

  Thereafter, when the power of the effect control device 300 is restored, the effect control device 300 is activated (t177). The effect control device 300 displays the restored image on the display device 41 until a command is received from the game control device 100 (t177 to t178). Then, when the command of A802h, which is a probability information command indicating that the game is highly probable with the start of the special figure variation display game, is received from the game control device 100, the decoration special figure variation display game is started with a highly probable effect. (T178). By doing so, it becomes possible to return to the effect corresponding to the game state without waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the change of the game state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 executes the customer waiting command shown in FIG. 141 (a) including the game state information in a state in which neither the special figure 1 change display game nor the special figure 2 change display game is executed. The information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when a certain customer wait is set. As shown in FIG. 141 (b), here, the power of the effect control device 300 is shut off for some reason (t181), and thereafter, the power of the effect control device 300 is restored and the effect control device 300 is activated ( t182).

  If the special figure fluctuating display game is started after the effect control device 300 is restored, the probability information command including the information on the game state is transmitted as described above, so that it is possible to return to the effect according to the game state. Neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and the customer waiting setting is performed (t184).

  The game control device 100 transmits a command of 8002h, which is a customer waiting command indicating that it is highly probable at the time of setting the customer waiting, and the effect control device 300 provides a highly probable advantage based on the information of the customer waiting command. Set the effect and wait for the customer. By doing so, it becomes possible to return to the effect corresponding to the game state without waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the change of the game state.

[Seventh Modification]
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. In the gaming machine of the present modified example, the period during which the upper limit value of the second start memory is reduced is different.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the upper limit number of the second start storage is reduced so as to match the remaining game number in the predetermined period before the end of the specific game state. As shown in (2), the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game causes a second start memory that is invalidated or cannot be consumed during the specific game state. Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present modification, the timing of decreasing the upper limit value of the second start memory is made earlier, and even if the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, all the second start memories are consumed during the specific game state. I am trying to be.

  FIG. 142 shows an example of the progress of the game in a predetermined period before the end of the specific game state. Here, it is assumed that no new big hit occurs in the specific game state, and all the special figure 2 variable display games in the specific game state are small hits. It is also assumed that the first start memory always exists.

  With the end of the second special game state based on the small hit, the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the 41st special figure variable display game in the specific game state, is started, the number of remaining games becomes 9, and the specific game The special figure 2 variable display game which is the 42nd special figure variable display game in the state is started, and the remaining game becomes 8 (t251). At this point, the upper limit of the second start storage is 4, which is the second upper limit. It is also assumed that four second start memories are stored. Thereafter, the special figure 2 variable display game stops with a small hit result, and the special figure 1 variable display game stops with a loss result (t252).

  Then, with the end of the second special game state based on the small hit, the special figure 1 variable display game which is the 43rd special figure variable display game in the specific game state is started, and the number of remaining games becomes 7, and The special figure 2 variable display game, which is the 44th special figure variable display game in the specific game state, is started, and the remaining games become 6 (t253).

  When the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the 43rd special figure variable display game in the specific game state, is started and the number of remaining games becomes 7, the number of remaining games is 8 times the second upper limit value. Less than. When the number of remaining games becomes less than the value obtained by doubling the difference between the second upper limit and the first upper limit (here, 8), the number of remaining games becomes an even number. The upper limit value is set to −1, and here the upper limit value is changed to 3 based on the remaining number of times being 6. That is, here, the second condition for starting the predetermined period in which the upper limit value is reduced is satisfied when the remaining number of the variable display games that can be executed in the specific game state is 6. Thereafter, similarly, as the remaining number becomes an even number, the upper limit value of the second start memory is decremented by one (t254, t255, t256), and reaches the first upper limit value by the end of the specific gaming state.

  By subtracting the upper limit number of the second start memory in this way, in the specific game state in which the game progresses mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is maximally executed as shown in FIG. Even if it does, all the second start memories will be consumed during the specific game state.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the high probability change frequency update process shown in FIG. 143 is performed instead of the high probability change frequency update process shown in FIG. In the updating process of the number of times of high probability change, when the number of times of high probability change is 0, 2, 4 or 6 (step Y1601; Y), the upper limit value of the second startup memory is set to -1 (step Y1602). ).

  As described above, the starting winning port includes the first starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 37, and the starting storage means (game control device 100) stores the game ball to the first starting winning port 36. A first starting storage means (game control device 100) capable of extracting a predetermined random number based on a winning and storing the predetermined random number as a first starting memory up to an upper limit, and a game ball to a second starting winning opening 37. And a second start storage means (game control device 100) capable of extracting a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game and storing the predetermined random number as a second start memory up to an upper limit value. The game control device 100) controls the execution of the first variable display game as the variable display game based on the start memory stored in the first start storage means. Device 100) and the second A second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of controlling the execution of the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the start memory stored in the storage means; The change means (game control device 100) increases the upper limit value at which the second start storage means stores the second start memory from the first upper limit value to the second upper limit value with the start of the specific game state, and When the remaining number of times of the variable display game that can be executed is smaller than the value obtained by doubling the difference between the second upper limit value and the first upper limit value, the upper limit value of the second start memory is set to 1 each time the remaining number of times becomes an even number. That is, the number is reduced. Therefore, even if the first variable display game is executed, it is possible to reduce the upper limit number while using the stored second start memory.

  Note that, in the gaming machine of the present modification, two or more special figure 1 variable display games are not started during execution of one special figure 2 variable display game in the specific gaming state. By reducing the upper limit value of the two start memories, all the second start memories are consumed during the specific game state. In the case of a gaming machine in which two or more special figure 1 variable display games may be started during execution of one special figure 2 variable display game, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is maximally executed. The timing for decreasing the upper limit value is set so that all the second start memories are consumed during the specific game state.

[Eighth Modification]
Next, an eighth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, the upper limit of the second start memory in the specific game state after the end of the first special game state based on the big hit is set according to the type of the big hit.

  FIG. 144 shows the type of big hit and the upper limit value set in the specific game state. When the big hit type is a big hit of 16R, the upper limit value of the second start memory is set to 4 in the subsequent specific game state. When the type of the big hit is the big hit of 8R, the upper limit value of the second start memory is set to 3 in the subsequent specific game state. When the type of the big hit is a big hit of 2R or 4R, the upper limit of the second start memory is set to 1 in the subsequent specific game state.

  Then, in step Y1118 of the special figure 1 big hit end processing shown in FIG. 82 and step Y1137 of the special figure 2 big hit end processing shown in FIG. 83, the upper limit value of the second start memory is set to a value according to the type of big hit. To do.

  From the above, the specific game state generating means (game control device 100) generates the specific game state with the end of the special game state, and the upper limit value changing means (game control device 100) sets the special game state to the end. The value of the second upper limit value in the specific game state is selected from a plurality of values based on the type of the special result that has triggered the occurrence of. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the special result and to improve the interest in the game.

[Ninth Modification]
Next, a ninth modification example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. In the gaming machine of the present modified example, the prefetch processing is performed without opening the random number stored as the start memory.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, a hard random number acquisition process shown in FIG. 145 is performed instead of the hard random number acquisition process shown in FIG. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; Y), the big hit random number is loaded from the target hard random number latch register into the IY register of the game microcomputer 111 (step X811). . Then, the jackpot random number loaded in the IY register is stored (copied) in the HL register of the gaming microcomputer 111 (step X812), the start-up winning information is set (step X516), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed. finish.

  Then, in step X529 in the special figure starting port 1 switch processing shown in FIG. 36 and in step X570 in the special figure starting port 2 switch processing shown in FIG. 38, the big hit random number stored in the HL register is stored in the big hit random number storage area. Save.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
Also, the special figure suspension information determination processing shown in FIG. 146 is performed instead of the special figure suspension information determination processing shown in FIG. In this special figure reservation information determination processing, a big hit random number is loaded from the IY register (step X813), and a prefetch processing is performed.

  That is, the jackpot random number stored as the start memory is stored in the HL register, and the jackpot random number used in the prefetching process is loaded in the IY register. Therefore, the prefetching process can be performed without opening the jackpot random number stored as the starting memory.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as described in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, but includes, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using gaming balls. Further, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be applied in appropriate combinations.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

32 game area 36 first start winning opening (start winning opening)
37 2nd start winning opening (start winning opening)
100 game control device (start storage means, game execution control means, upper limit changing means, specific game state generation means, first start storage means, second start storage means, first variable display game execution control means, second variable display Game execution control means)

Claims (1)

A special game state in which a variable display game is executed based on winning of a game ball in a starting winning opening provided in a game area and a special value is given to a player when a result of the variable display game is a special result. In a gaming machine that generates
A first starting winning opening and a second starting winning opening are provided as the starting winning opening;
A first variable display game is executed as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port, and a second variable display game is executed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting winning port. A variable display game execution control means for executing a variable display game;
An effect display device capable of executing a decoration variation display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information corresponding to the variation display game,
As the game modes, there are provided a first game mode defined as a variable display game in which the first variable display game is the main, and a second game mode defined as a variable display game in which the second variable display game is the main. And
The special result includes a first special result and a second special result having a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special result,
When displaying the number-of-executable times or the number-of-games information on the number of times of execution of the variable display game in the predetermined period on the effect display device, the number-of-games information is displayed during a period in which the variable display game is not mainly executed. Not
If the first variable display games and results of at least the first said during the variable display game second variable display games of the second variable display game becomes the first special results, the first Stopping the first variable display game with a result other than the special result, and not restarting the first variable display game after the special game state based on the second variable display game ends;
If the first variable display games and results of at least the first said during the variable display game second variable display games of the second variable display game becomes the second special results, the first interrupted one variable display game gaming machine, characterized in that the said second variable display games special gaming state rather based resume the first variable display game that was interrupted at the end of completion.

Images